0% found this document useful (0 votes)

800 views

DCN Bits

The document contains questions and answers about networking concepts like LANs, topologies, networking devices, protocols and network layers. It covers topics such as network components, Ethernet addressing, topologies, WAN usage, network devices, servers, small networks, Ethernet, the physical layer, communication channels and networking fundamentals.

Uploaded by

kuderu harshitha

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

800 views

DCN Bits

Uploaded by

kuderu harshitha

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 489

1. Which of the following items is not used in Local Area Networks(LANs)?

A. Computer Modem
B. Cable
C. Modem
D. Interface card
Answer C
2. Which of the following represents the fastest data transmission speed?

A. Gbps
B. Kbps
C. Bps
D. Bandwidth
Answer A
3. A device that connects to a network with our the use of cables is said to be

A. Open source
B. Cabled
C. Distributed
D. Wireless
Answer D
4. WI–FI uses

A. Phase line
B. Radio waves
C. Optic fiber
D. Sound waves
Answer.B

5. Network components are connected to the same cable in the _______ topology.

A. Mesh
B. Bus
C. Star
D. Ring
Answer B
6. How many bits are there in the Ethernet address?

A. 16 bits
B. 32 bits
C. 48 bits
D. 64 bits
Answer C
7. Geometric arrangement of devices on the network is called

A. Protocols
B. Topology
C. Trailer
D. LAN
Answer B
8. Which type of network would use phone lines?

A. Wireless
B. WAN
C. LAN
D. WWAN
Answer B

9. Which of the following is not a network device?

A. Router
B. Modem
C. Bridge
D. Switch
Answer B
10. Servers are other computer which provide resources to other computer connected by

A. Super computer
B. Mainframe
C. Network
D. Client
Answer C
11. Which of the following refers to a small, single-site network?

A. RAM
B. DSL
C. USB
D. PAN
Answer D
12. Ethernet uses

A. Mesh topology
B. Ring topology
C. Bus topology
D. All of these
Answer C

13. A device operating at the physical layer is called a

A. Bridge
B. Router
C. Repeater
D. All of these
Answer c
14. Which of the following is the fastest communication channel?

A. Micro wave
B. Optical fiber
C. Radio wave
D. None of the above
Answer A
15. Encryption and decryption are the function of

A. Session layer
B. Presentation layer
C. Transport layer
D. None of the above
Answer B
16. _______ is the most important/powerful computer in a typical network.

A. Desktop
B. Network client
C. Network server
D. Network station
Answer C

17. In a ring topology, the computer in possession of the ______ can transmit data.

A. Data
B. Packet
C. Access method
D. Token
Answer D
18. How many layers are in the TCP/IP model?

A. 4 layers
B. 5 layers
C. 7 layers
D. 8 layers
Answer B
19. Which of the following topologies is not of broadcast type

A. Bus
B. Ring
C. Star
D. All of these
Answer A
20. An alternate name for the completely interconnected network topology is

A. Mesh
B. Star
C. Tree
D. Ring
Answer A

21. What is the use of bridge in network?

A. To connect LAN’s
B. To separate LAN’s
C. To control network speed
D. None of these
Answer A
22. What type of resource is most likely to be a shared common resource in a computer network?

A. Printers
B. Speakers
C. Floppy disk drives
D. Keyboards
Answer A
23. The first network that has planted the seeds of internet was

A. NSF net
B. V net
C. ARPANET
D. I net
Answer C
24. To send data/message to and from computer the network software puts the message information in a

A. Packet
B. NIC
C. Trailer
D. Header
Answer A

25. _______ allows LAN users to share computer programs and data.

A. Print server
B. Communication server
C. File server
D. None of these
Answer C
26. An inter–company network which used to distribute information documents files and database is called as

A. MAN
B. WAN
C. LAN
D. Switch
Answer C
27. In OSI network architecture, the routing is performed by

A. Data link layer

B. Network layer
C. Session layer
D. Transport layer
Answer B
28. Hub is associated with______ network.

A. Bus
B. Star
C. Ring
D. Mesh
Answer B

29. A combination of hardware and software that allows communication and electronic transfer of information betw
een computer is a

A. Network
B. Server
C. Peripheral
D. Backup system
Answer A
30. LAN can use ________ architecture.
A. Client and server
B. Peer–to–peer
C. Both a and b
D. Neither A or B
Answer C
31. P2P is a _______ application architecture.

A. 1–tier
B. Network client
C. Client/server
D. None of these
Answer C
32. ________ is the transmission of data between two or more computer over communication links.

A. Data communication
B. Data networking
C. Networking
D. Communication
Answer A

33. Communication channel having ______ types.

A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
Answer C
34. LAN can use ________ architecture.

A. Client and server

B. Peer–to–peer
C. Both a and b
D. Neither A or B
Answer C
35. P2P is a _______ application architecture.

A. 1–tier
B. Network client
C. Client/server
D. None of these
Answer C
36. ________ is the transmission of data between two or more computer over communication links.

A. Data communication
B. Data networking
C. Networking
D. Communication
Answer A

1. In a _______ connection, more than two devices can share a single link.
(a) Point-to-point
(b) Primary
(c) Multi-point
(d) Secondary

View Answer
(c) Multi-point
2. Communication between a computer and a keyboard involves ______________
transmission
(a) Full-duplex
(b) Half-duplex
(c) Simplex
(d) None of these

View Answer
(c) Simplex
3. In a network with 25 computers, which topology would require the most
extensive cabling?
(a) Star
(b) Mesh
(c) Bus
(d) None of these

View Answer
(b) Mesh
4. Which topology requires a central controller or hub?
a. Star
b. Mesh
c. Bus
d. Ring

View Answer
a. Star
5. The _______ is the physical path over which a message travels.
a. Protocol
b. Medium
c. Signal
d. All of the above

View Answer

6. Which organization has authority over interstate and international commerce in the communications field?
a. ITU-T
b. IEEE
c. ISO
d. FCC

View Answer
d. FCC
7. The information to be communicated in a data communications system is the ________
a. Medium
b. Protocol
c. Transmission
d. Message

View Answer
d. Message
8. Frequency of failure and network recovery time after a failure are measures of the
_______ of a network.
a. Performance
b. Security
c. Reliability
d. Feasibility

View Answer
(c) Reliability
9. In _______ transmission, the channel capacity is shared by both communicating devices at all times.
a. Full-duplex
b. Simplex
c. Half-duplex
d. Half-Simplex

View Answer
(a) Full-duplex
10. An unauthorized user is a network _______ issue.
a. Performance
b. Reliability
c. Security
d. All of the above

View Answer
(c) Security

11. Which topology requires a multipoint connection?

a. Mesh
b. Star
c. Ring
d. Bus

View Answer
(d) Bus
12. A television broadcast is an example of _______ transmission.
a. Half-duplex
b. Full-duplex
c. Simplex
d. Automatic

View Answer
(c) Simplex
13. A _______ connection provides a dedicated link between two devices.
a. Multi-point
b. Point-to-Point
c. Primary
d. Secondary

View Answer
(b) Point-to-Point
14. A cable break in a _______ topology stops all transmission.
a. Mesh
b. Star
c. Primary
d. Bus

View Answer
(d) Bus
15. The _______ layer changes bits into electromagnetic signals.
a. Physical
b. Transport
c. None of the above
d. Data link

View Answer
(a) Physical
16. The physical layer is concerned with the transmission of _______ over the physical medium.
a. Programs
b. Protocols
c. Bits
d. Dialog

View Answer
c. Bits
17. Mail services are available to network users through the _______ layer.
a. Data link
b. Physical
c. Application
d. Transport

View Answer
c. Application
18. As the data packet moves from the lower to the upper layers, headers are _______.
a. Added
b. Rearranged
c. Modified
d. Subtracted

View Answer
d. Subtracted
19. As the data packet moves from the upper to the lower layers, headers are _______.
a. Removed
b. Added
c. Rearranged
d. Modified

View Answer
b. Added
20. The _______ layer lies between the network layer and the application layer.
a. Data link
b. Physical
c. Transport
d. None of the above

View Answer
c. Transport
21. Layer 2 lies between the physical layer and the _______ layer.
a. Data link
b. Network
c. Transport
d. None of the above

View Answer
b. Network
22. When data are transmitted from device A to device B, the header from A’s layer 4 is read by B’s _______ layer.
a. Application
b. Physical
c. Transport
d. None of the above

View Answer
c. Transport
23. Which layer functions as a liaison between user support layers and network support layers?
a. Network layer
b. Transport layer
c. Physical layer
d. Application layer

View Answer
b. Transport layer
24. What is the main function of the transport layer?
a. Process-to-process delivery
b. Node-to-node delivery
c. Synchronization
d. Updating and maintenance of routing tables

View Answer
a. Process-to-process delivery
25. Which of the following is an application layer service?
a. Remote log-in
b. File transfer and access
c. Mail service
d. All the above

View Answer
d. All the above

26. The Internet model consists of _______ layers.

a. Three
b. Five
c. Seven
d. Eight

View Answer
b. Five
27. The process-to-process delivery of the entire message is the responsibility of the _______ layer.
a. Physical
b. Network
c. Transport
d. Application

View Answer
c. Transport
28. The _______ layer is the layer closest to the transmission medium.
a. Network
b. Physical
c. Data link
d. Transport

View Answer
b. Physical
29. Before data can be transmitted, they must be transformed to ________.
a. Electromagnetic signals
b. Periodic signals
c. Aperiodic signals
d. Low-frequency sine waves

View Answer
a. Electromagnetic signals
30. When one of the components of a signal has a frequency of zero, the average amplitude of the signal ________.
a. Is less than zero
b. Is greater than zero
c. Is zero
d. (a) or (b)

View Answer
b. Is greater than zero

31. A periodic signal can always be decomposed into ________.

a. Exactly an odd number of sine waves
b. A set of sine waves, one of which must have a phase of 0°
c. A set of sine waves
d. None of the above

View Answer
c. A set of sine waves
32. A periodic signal completes one cycle in 0.001 s. What is the frequency?
a. 1 Hz
b. 100 Hz
c. 1 KHz
d. 1 MHz

View Answer
c. 1 KHz
33. In a frequency-domain plot, the horizontal axis measures the ________.
a. Frequency
b. Peak amplitude
c. Phase
d. Slope

View Answer
a. Frequency
34. In a time-domain plot, the vertical axis is a measure of ________.
a. Frequency
b. Phase
c. Amplitude
d. Time

View Answer
c. Amplitude
35. If the bandwidth of a signal is 5 KHz and the lowest frequency is 52 KHz, what is the highest frequency?
a. 5 KHz
b. 10 KHz
c. 47 KHz
d. 57 KHz

View Answer
d. 57 KHz
36. What is the bandwidth of a signal that ranges from 40 KHz to 4 MHz?
a. 3.96 MHz
b. 36 MHz
c. 360 KHz
d. 396 KHz

View Answer
a. 3.96 MHz
37. As frequency increases, the period ________.
a. Decreases
b. Increases
c. Remains the same
d. Doubles

View Answer
a. Decreases
38. When propagation speed is multiplied by propagation time, we get the ________.
a. Throughput
b. Wavelength of the signal
c. Distance a signal or bit has traveled
d. Distortion factor

View Answer
c. Distance a signal or bit has traveled
39. Propagation time is ________ proportional to distance and ________ proportional to propagation speed.
a. Inversely; directly
b. Inversely; inversely
c. Directly; inversely
d. Directly; directly

View Answer
c. Directly; inversely
40. Wavelength is ________ proportional to propagation speed and ________ proportional to period.
a. Directly; directly
b. Inversely; directly
c. Directly; inversely
d. Inversely; inversely

View Answer
a. Directly; directly

41. Which of the following can be determined from a frequency-domain graph of a signal?
a. Phase
b. Power
c. Frequency
d. Bandwidth

View Answer
d. Bandwidth

42. Which of the following can be determined from a frequency-domain graph of a signal?
a. Phase
b. Bandwidth
c. Power
d. All the above

View Answer
b. Bandwidth
43. In a frequency-domain plot, the vertical axis measures the ________.
a. Frequency
b. Peak amplitude
c. Phase
d. Slope

View Answer
b. Peak amplitude
44. Given two sine waves A and B, if the frequency of A is twice that of B, then the period of B is ________ that of
A.
a. One-half
b. Twice
c. The same as
d. Indeterminate from

View Answer
b. Twice
45. The wavelength of green light in air is ________ the wavelength of green light in fiber-optic cable.
a. Greater than
b. Less than
c. Equal to
d. None of the above

View Answer
b. Less than
46. Using the Shannon formula to calculate the data rate for a given channel, if C = B, then ________.
a. The signal is equal to the noise
b. The signal is less than the noise
c. The signal is greater than the noise
d. Not enough information is given to the question

View Answer
a. The signal is equal to the noise
47. A sine wave is ________.
a. Aperiodic and continuous
b. Periodic and discrete
c. Aperiodic and discrete
d. Periodic and continuous

View Answer
d. Periodic and continuous
48. If the maximum amplitude of a sine wave is 2 V, the minimum amplitude is ________ V.
a. 2
b. 1
c. -2
d. Between -2 and 2

View Answer
c. -2
49. A signal is measured at two different points. The power is P1 at the first point and P2 at the second point. The d
B is 0. This means ________.
a. P2 is zero
b. P2 equals P1
c. P2 is much larger than P1
d. P2 is much smaller than P1

View Answer
b. P2 equals P1
50. ________ is a type of transmission impairment in which the signal loses strength due to the resistance of the tran
smission medium.
a. Distortion
b. Noise
c. Decibel
d. Attenuation

View Answer
d. Attenuation

51. ________ is a type of transmission impairment in which the signal loses strength due to the different propagatio
n speeds of each frequency that makes up the signal.
a. Attenuation
b. Noise
c. Distortion
d. Decibel

View Answer
c. Distortion
52. ________ is a type of transmission impairment in which an outside source such as crosstalk corrupts a signal.
a. Attenuation
b. Noise
c. Distortion
d. Decibel

View Answer
b. Noise

53. The ________ has units of meters/second or kilometers/second.

a. Throughput
b. Propagation time
c. Propagation speed
d. (b) and (c)

View Answer
c. Propagation speed

54. ________ has units of bits/second.

a. Throughput
b. Propagation speed
c. Propagation time
d. (b) and (c)

View Answer
a. Throughput

55. The ________ has units of seconds.

a. Throughput
b. Propagation time
c. Propagation speed
d. (a) and (b)

View Answer
b. Propagation time

56. The wavelength of a signal depends on the ________.

a. Frequencies of the signal
b. Medium
c. Phase of the signal
d. (a) and (b)

View Answer
d. (a) and (b)

57. Which encoding technique attempts to solve the loss of synchronization due to long strings of 0s?
a. NRZ
b. BnZS
c. AMI
d. (a) and (b)

View Answer
b. BnZS

58. Block coding can help in _______ at the receiver.

a. Synchronization
b. Error detection
c. Attenuation
d. (a) and (b)
View Answer
d. (a) and (b)

59. In _______ transmission, bits are transmitted simultaneously, each across its own wire.
a. Parallel
b. Asynchronous serial
c. Synchronous serial
d. (a) and (b)

View Answer
a. Parallel

60. Unipolar, bipolar, and polar encoding are types of _______ encoding.
a. Block
b. Line
c. NRZ
d. Manchester

View Answer
b. Line

61. _______ encoding has a transition at the middle of each bit.

a. RZ
b. Manchester
c. Differential Manchester
d. All the above

View Answer
d. All the above

62. _______ encoding has a transition at the beginning of each 0 bit.

a. Differential Manchester
b. RZ
c. Manchester
d. All the above

View Answer
a. Differential Manchester

63. PCM is an example of _______ conversion.

a. Analog-to-analog
b. Analog-to-digital
c. Digital-to-digital
d. Digital-to-analog

View Answer
b. Analog-to-digital
64. If the frequency spectrum of a signal has a bandwidth of 500 Hz with the highest frequency at 600 Hz, what sho
uld be the sampling rate, according to the Nyquist theorem?
a. 500 samples/s
b. 1000 samples/s
c. 200 samples/s
d. 1200 samples/s

View Answer
d. 1200 samples/s

65. One factor in the accuracy of a reconstructed PCM signal is the _______.
a. Number of bits used for quantization
b. Signal bandwidth
c. Carrier frequency
d. Baud rate

View Answer
a. Number of bits used for quantization

66. In asynchronous transmission, the gap time between bytes is _______.

a. Fixed
b. A function of the data rate
c. Variable
d. Zero

View Answer
c. Variable

67. Synchronous transmission does not have _______.

a. A start bit
b. A stop bit
c. Gaps between bytes
d. All the above

View Answer
d. All the above

68. Which encoding type always has a nonzero average amplitude?

a. Polar
b. Bipolar
c. Uni-polar
d. All the above

View Answer
c. Uni-polar

69. Which of the following encoding methods does not provide for synchronization?
a. Manchester
b. NRZ-L
c. RZ
d. NRZ-I

View Answer
b. NRZ-L

70. Which encoding method uses alternating positive and negative values for 1s?
a. Manchester
b. AMI
c. NRZ-I
d. RZ

View Answer
b. AMI

71. In PCM, an analog-to- _______ conversion occurs.

a. Analog
b. Digital
c. QAM
d. Differential

View Answer
b. Digital

72. If the maximum value of a PCM signal is 31 and the minimum value is -31, how many bits were used for coding
?
a. 4
b. 5
c. 6
d. 7

View Answer
c. 6

73. RZ encoding involves _______ signal levels.

a. Five
b. Four
c. Three
d. Two

View Answer
c. Three

74. Which quantization level results in a more faithful reproduction of the signal?
a. 2
b. 8
c. 16
d. 32

View Answer
d. 32

75. n _______ transmission, bits are transmitted over a single wire, one at a time.
a. Asynchronous serial
b. Synchronous serial
c. Parallel
d. (a) and (b)

View Answer
d. (a) and (b)

76. In _______ transmission, a start bit and a stop bit frame a character byte.
a. Synchronous serial
b. Asynchronous serial
c. Parallel
d. (a) and (b)

View Answer
b. Asynchronous serial

77. If a symbol is composed of 3 bits, there are _______ data levels.

a. 2
b. 4
c. 8
d. 16

View Answer
c. 8

78. The Nyquist theorem specifies the minimum sampling rate to be_______.
a. Twice the bandwidth of a signal
b. Twice the highest frequency of a signal
c. Equal to the lowest frequency of a signal
d. Equal to the highest frequency of a signal

View Answer
b. Twice the highest frequency of a signal

79. Pulse rate is always _______ the bit rate.

a. Less than
b. Less than or equal to
c. Greater than
d. Greater than or equal to

View Answer
b. Less than or equal to

80. AM and FM are examples of ________ modulation.

a. Analog-to-analog
b. Analog-to-digital
c. Digital-to-digital
d. Digital-to-analog

View Answer
a. Analog-to-analog

81. In QAM, both phase and ________ of a carrier frequency are varied.
a. Frequency
b. Bit rate
c. Amplitude
d. Baud rate

View Answer
c. Amplitude

82. Which of the following is most affected by noise?

a. PSK
b. FSK
c. QAM
d. ASK

View Answer
d. ASK

83. ASK, PSK, FSK, and QAM are examples of ________ modulation.
a. Analog-to-analog
b. Analog-to-digital
c. Digital-to-digital
d. Digital-to-analog

View Answer
d. Digital-to-analog

84. If the baud rate is 400 for a 4-PSK signal, the bit rate is ________ bps.
a. 1600 100
b. 800
c. 400
d. 100

View Answer
b. 800

85. If the bit rate for an ASK signal is 1200 bps, the baud rate is ________.
a. 300
b. 400
c. 600
d. 1200
View Answer
d. 1200

86. As the bit rate of an FSK signal increases, the bandwidth ________.
a. Remains the same
b. Decreases
c. Increases
d. Doubles

View Answer
c. Increases

87. In 16-QAM, there are 16 ________.

a. Phases
b. Combinations of phase and amplitude
c. Amplitudes
d. bps

View Answer
b. Combinations of phase and amplitude

88. Which modulation technique involves tribits, eight different phase shifts, and one amplitude?
a. FSK
b. ASK
c. 4-PSK
d. 8-PSK

View Answer
d. 8-PSK

89. If the bit rate for an FSK signal is 1200 bps, the baud rate is ________.
a. 300
b. 400
c. 600
d. 1200

View Answer
d. 1200

90. If the bit rate for a QAM signal is 3000 bps and a signal unit is represented by a tribit, what is the baud rate?
a. 300
b. 400
c. 1000
d. 1200

View Answer
c. 1000

91. If the baud rate for a QAM signal is 3000 and a signal unit is represented by a tribit, what is the bit rate?
a. 300
b. 400
c. 1000
d. 9000

View Answer
d. 9000

92. If the baud rate for a QAM signal is 1800 and the bit rate is 9000, how many bits are there per signal unit?
a. 3
b. 4
c. 5
d. 6

View Answer
c. 5

93. A modulated signal is formed by ________.

a. Changing the carrier wave by the modulating signal
b. Quantization of the source data
c. Changing the modulating signal by the carrier wave
d. Sampling at the Nyquist frequency

View Answer
a. Changing the carrier wave by the modulating signal

94. If FCC regulations are followed, the carrier frequencies of adjacent AM radio stations are ________ apart.
a. 5 KHz
b. 10 KHz
c. 200 KHz
d. 530 KHz

View Answer
b. 10 KHz

95. If FCC regulations are followed, ________ potential FM stations are theoretically possible in a given area.
a. 50
b. 100
c. 133
d. 150

View Answer
a. 50

96. When an ASK signal is decomposed, the result is ________.

a. An infinite number of sine waves
b. Always one sine wave
c. Always two sine waves
d. None of the above
View Answer
a. An infinite number of sine waves

97. The bandwidth of an FM signal requires 10 times the bandwidth of the _______ signal.
a. Bipolar
b. Sampling
c. Carrier
d. Modulating

View Answer
d. Modulating

98. Modulation of an analog signal can be accomplished through changing the ________ of the carrier signal.
a. Amplitude
b. Frequency
c. Phase
d. Any of the above

View Answer
d. Any of the above

99. For a telephone line, the bandwidth for voice is usually _______ the bandwidth for data.
a. Less than
b. Greater than
c. Twice
d. Equivalent to

View Answer
b. Greater than

100. For a given bit rate, the minimum bandwidth for ASK is ________ the minimum bandwidth for FSK.
a. Less than
b. Equivalent to
c. Greater than
d. Twice

View Answer
a. Less than
Q.1 What is the minimum number of wires needed to send data over it serial communication link layer?

(A) 1

(B) 2

(D) 4

Hide Answer

Ans . B

You should also check Important Question of Indian Geography

Q.2 Which data communication method is used to send data over a serial communication link?

(A) simplex

(B) half duplex

(C) full duplex

(D) all of these

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.3 Which of the following statements is incorrect?

(A) teleprocessing combing telecommunication and DP techniques in online activities.

(B) Multiplexers are designed to accept data from several I/O devices and transmit a unified stream of data on one c
ommunication line.

(D) batch processing is the preferred processing mode for telecommunication operations.

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.8 The area of coverage of a satellite radio beam is called its….

(A) beam width

(B) circular polarization

(D) identity

Hide Answer
Ans . C
Q.9 The amount of uncertainty in a system of the symbol is called.

(A) bandwidth

(B) entropy

(D) quantum

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.10 Buffering is….

(A) the process of temporarily storing the data to allow for small variation in device speeds.

(B) a method to reduce cross-talks

(D) a method to reduce the routing overhead

Hide Answer

Ans . A

Q.11 What is the main difference between synchronous and asynchronous transmission?

(A) band width required is different.

(B) pulse height is different.

(C) clocking is derived from the data in synchronous transmission.

(D) clocking is mixed with data in asynchronous transmission.

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.12 The transmission signal coding method for T, the carrier is called…..

(A) NRZ

(B) Bipolar

(D) Binary

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Watch Video of Indian Constitutions: hp-4-indian-constitution-in-hindi-fundamental-rights

Q.13 In a synchronous modem, the digital-to-analog converter sends a signal to the……

(A) transmission line

(B) modulator

Hide Answer
Ans . B
Q.17 How much power (approximately) a light-emitting diode can couple into an optical fiber?

(A) 1 picowatt

(B) 100 microwatts

(D) 10 watts

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.18 Avalanche photodiode receiver can detect bits of transmitted data by receiving.

(A) 1 Photon

(B) 100 photons

(D) 200 photons

Hide Answer

Ans . D
Q.19 The loss in signal power as light travels down the fiber is called.

(A) propagation

(B) attenuation

(D) absorption

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.20 Multiple repeaters in communication satellites are called.

(A) detector

(B) modulator

(D) stations

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.21 how many bits per symbol are used in the Baudot code?

(A) 5

(B) 7

(C 8

(D) 9

Hide Answer

Ans . A

Watch Video of Indian Constitutions Part 3: p-3-indian-constitution-in-hindi-bharat-ka-samvidhan

Q.22 While transmitting odd-parity coded symbols, the number of zeros in each symbol is….

(A) odd

(B) even

(D) none of these

Ans . B
Q.27 A group of packets from a source through an X.25 packet system to sink.

(A) arrive in the same order sent for VC, but not for PVC

(B) arrive in the same order sent for PVC, but not for VC

(D) None of these

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.28 How many OSI layers are covered in the X.25 standard?

(A) three

(B) four

(D) seven

Hide Answer
Ans . A
Q.29 A protocol is a rule governing a time sequence of events that must take place.

(A) between peers

(B) across an interface

(C) between non-peers

(D) none of these

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.30 What is the number of separate protocol layers at the serial interface gateway specified by the X.25 standard?

(A) 2

(B) 3

(D) 7

Hide Answer

Ans . B

Q.31 Layer one of the OSI model is…….

(A) physical layer

(B) link layer

(C) transport layer

(D) network layer

Hide Answer

Ans . A

Q.32 Establishing a virtual connection is functionally equivalent to ……

(A) physically connecting a DTE and DCE

(B) connecting a virtual memory

(C) placing a telephone call prior to a conversation

(D) none of these

Hide Answer
Ans . C
Q.33 What is the main purpose of a data link content monitor?

(A) measurement of bit error rate.

(B) Determine the type of switching used in a data link.

(C) Determine the type of transmission used in a data link.

(D) Detect problems in protocols.

Hide Answer

Ans . D
Q.34 Protocol converters are ……

(A) same as multiplexers

(B) same as TDMs

(A) A teletype printing news bulletins.

(B) A computer transmitting files to another computer

(D) A salesman telephoning orders to the office

Hide Answer

Ans . D
Q.43 The standard ASCII ….

(A) is version II of the ASC standard

(D) Many

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.47 Digital cellular radio systems……

(A) expand the number of cells.

(B) allow multiple subscribers to share the use of cells.

(D) extend transmission distance of subscribers within a cell.

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.48 Transmission of binary signals require……

(A) less bandwidth than analog

(B) more bandwidth than analog

(C) same bandwidth as analog

(D) a Licence from the FAA

Hide Answer
Ans . B
Q.49 The standard first-level digital multiplex system in the United States operates at……

(A) 2.048 Mbps

(B) 44.736 Mbps

(C) 1.544 Mbps

(D) 9600 Mbps

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.50 The use of Dataphone Digital Services.

(A) can be expected to increase

(B) provides a higher operating rate than FTI service.

(D) provides a higher operating rate than T

Hide Answer

Ans . C

Q.51 Modulation is…….

(A) varying of some parameter of a carrier, such as its amplitude to transmit information.

(B) utilization of a single transmission channel to carrying multiple signals.

(C) transmission of pulses in DC form over a copper wire.

(D) none of these.

Hide Answer

Ans . A

Q.52 RS-232, RS-449, RS-530, V-24, and X-21 are examples of?

(A) standards for various types of transmission channels.

(B) standards for interfaces between terminals and modems.

(C) two methods of error detection and correction.

(D) standards for end-to-end performance of data communication systems.

Hide Answer
Ans . B
Q.53 V.42 defines….

(A) compatibility with MNP Class 5 data compression.

(B) a method of data storage.

(C) two methods of error detection and correction.

(D) compatibility with MNP Class 7 enhanced data compression.

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.54 The cable connecting a DB-9 connector at one end to a DB-25 connector at the other end must cross-connect pi
n 8 at the BD-9 side to which pin at the DB-25 side.

(A) 4

(B) 22

(D) 2

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.55 A smart modem can.

(A) detect transmission errors and correct them automatically.

(B) correctly answer multiple choice quizzes

(C) accept commands from the terminals Via Rs-232 interface.

(D) none of these.

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.56 Many cables have “RS-232” connectors with some wires crossed or connected to each other because….

(A) there are various RS-232 standards.

(B) many computers and peripherals use RS-232 serial interfaces, but not as DTE-to-DCE.

(D) none of these.

Hide Answer
Ans . B
Q.57 Extended command sets supported by modern modems.

(A) are standardized.

(B) are prefixed with the letter E.

(C) use different commands to control many advanced modem features.

(D) can be counted on to provide a high-speed data transfer capability without requiring flow control.

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.58 Binary codes are sometimes transformed in modems into.

(A) Hexadecimal

(B) Huffman codes

(C) Gray code

(D) Complementary codes

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.59 A Western Electric 201 modem operates with a carrier frequency of….

(A) 1000 Hz

(B) 1200 Hz

(D) 600 Hz

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.60 The CCITT V.26 modem has a modulation rate of …..

(A) 1200 Hz

(B) 1200 bands

(C) 1560 cps

(D) none of these

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.61 If a modem packs six bits into each signal change and operates at 14,400 bps, it can result in a maximum throu
ghput of.

(A) 2400 bps

(B) 4800 bps

(C) 9600 bps

(D) 14 400 bps

Hide Answer

Ans . D

Exam Based History GK Questions: exam-based-history-gk-questions-of-gupta-empire

Q.62 A bipolar violation.

Ans . B
Q.65 Frequency division multiplexing has essentially been replaced by time division multiplexing is because….

(A) there is more time than frequency.

(B) it is difficult to place channels side by side.

(C) noise is amplified with voice when an FDM system is used.

(D) most available frequencies have been used.

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.66 When the amplitude of pulses is varied to represent analog information, the method is called.

(A) PCM

(B) PWM

(D) PPM

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q. 67 PCM sampling rate is 8000 samples per second because…..

(A) that represents the maximum rate that technology supports.

(B) this rate allows unique values.

(C) this rate allows the faithful recon-traction of an analog signal.

(D) this rate is easily produced by a sampling chip.

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.68 In general digital transmission provides a higher level of signal quality than angling transmission because….

(A) repeaters regenerate digital pulses and remove distortion, whereas amplifiers distortion to the signal.

(B) digital signals are smaller than analog signals and cannot be easily distorted.

(D) the digital signal is easier to sample than analog signals.

Hide Answer
Ans . D
Q.69 The D4 framing pattern contains a sequence of ….

(A) 24 bits

(B) 4 terminals and 8 framing bits.

(C) 8 terminals and 4 framing bits.

(D) 12 bits

Hide Answer

Ans . D
Q.70 Bipolar signaling is used in place of unipolar signaling on T lines because….

(A) bipolar signaling produces twice as many marks as a unipolar signal.

(B) it allows transmission at polar locations.

(C) bipolar signaling reduces residual DC voltage buildup, allowing a digital signal to be separated from power thro
ugh the use of a transformer.

(D) it allows transformers to be spaced far from one another, which reduces the cost of transmission.

Hide Answer

Ans . C

Q.71 Two computers that communicate with each other use a simple parity check to detect errors for ASCII transmis
sions. Which of the following events will always lead to an undetected error?

(A) one bit or any odd number of bits inverted in a block of data during transmission

(B) Two bits or any even number of bits inverted in a block during transmission

(D) Two bits or any even number of bits inverted in a byte during transmission.

Hide Answer

Ans . D
Q.72 RS-232-C.

(A) is an interface between two data circuit terminating equipment as exemplified by a local and remote modem.

(B) is an interface standard between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit Terminating Equipment’s.

(D) requires only 7 pins out of 25 in order to transmit digital data over public telephone lines.

Hide Answer
Ans . B
Q.73 The probability that a single bit will be in error on a typical public tele-phone line using 4800 bps modem is 10
-3. If no error detection mechanism is used, the residual error rate for a communication line using 9-bit frames is app
roximately equal to…

(A) 0.003

(B) 0.009

(D) 0.999

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.74 The signal to noise ratio for a voice grade line is 30.1 dB (Decibels) or a power ratio of 1023: 1. The maximum
achievable data rate on this line whose spectrum ranges from 30 Hz to 3400 Hz is….

(A) 6200 bps

(B) 9600 bps

(C) 34000 bps

(D) 31000 bps

Hide Answer

Ans . D
Q.75 The residual error rate is the…..

(A) number of bit errors per twenty-four hours of continuous operation on an asynchronous line.

(B) probability that one or more errors will be undetected when an error detection scheme is used.

(D) signal to noise ratio divided by the ratio of energy per bit to noise per hertz.

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.76 Which layer os international standard organization OSI model is responsible for creating and recognizing fram
e boundaries?

(A) physical layer

(B) data link layer

(C) transport layer

(D) network layer

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.77 If digital data rate of 9600 bps is encoded using 8-level phase shift keying (PSK) method, the modulation rate i
s….

(A) 1200 bauds

Ans . D
Q.80 Which of the following are parameters that must be set in your software and modem before you can begin com
munications?

(B) line

(D) all of these

Hide Answer

Ans . D
Q.84 A half-duplex communication channel permits information to travel…

(A) both ways at once

(B) both ways, but not at once

(C) one direction only

(D) at timed intervals

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.85 Carrier is….

(A) one or more conductors that serve as a common connection for a related group a device.

(B) a continuous frequency capable of being modulated or impressed with a second signal

(D) a collection of interconnected functional units that provides a data communications service among stations attac
hed to the network.

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.89 Internet address can be used to refer to networks as well as individual hosts. By convention, the network addre
ss has hosted with all bits.

(A) 0

(B) 1

(C) combinations of 0 and 1

(D) none of these

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.90 The 32-bit internet address 10000000 000010100 0000010 00011110 will be written in dotted decimal notation
as…….

(A) 148.20.2.30

(B) 164.100.9.61

(D) 128.10.2.30

Hide Answer

Ans . D

Q.91 B, Zero Code Suppression is a technique that …

(A) allows data to flow on a digital line

(B) ensures that each byte has at least one-mark bit

(D) provides a clear channel transmission capability, allowing 64 kbps data transmission on a voice4 channel

Hide Answer

Ans . D

Q.92 International bipolar violations……

(A) represent coding errors caused by line impairments

(B) are used to convey information or maintain a minimum number of ones on a digital line

Ans . D
Q.98 A voice/data multiplexer will not flow control….

(A) voice

(B) data

(C) time slots

(D) odd channels

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.99 The core for an optical fiber has….

(A) lower index of refraction than air

(B) lower index of refraction than the cladding

(C) a higher index of refraction than the cladding

(D) none of these

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.100 Over a period of 30 years, a kilometer of fiber optic cable is likely to be broken.

(A) not at all

(B) once

Hide Answer

Ans . D

Q.101 Deposition of dopants on fiber preforms is done by….

(A) outside vapor deposition

(B) axial vapor deposition

(C) inside vapor deposition

(D) all of these

Hide Answer

Ans . D

102 One unsolved problem with satellite system is….

(A) coverage

(B) privacy

(D) access

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.103 When the index of refraction is greater in Material 1 than it is in Material 2, the velocity of propagation in Ma
terial 1 compared to Material 2 is……

(A) equal or greater

(B) greater

(D) equal

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.104 The different angles of entry of light into an optical fiber in which the diameter of the core is many times the
wavelength of the light transmitted are called.

(A) Emitters
(B) Modes

(D) Refractors

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.105 In single-mode fiber, a large fraction of the power is propagated in the……

(A) sheath

(B) core

(D) air

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.106 The coupling efficiency of an Led light source to an optical fiber with a numerical aperture of 0.2 or more is
……

(A) 60 per cent

(B) 10 per cent

(C) 2 per cent

(D) 0.1 per cent

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.107 The FT3C light wave system contains which of the following number of fibers?

(A) 12

(B) 144

(D) 64

Hide Answer

Ans . D
Q.108 A key advantage of Sonet is its capability to enable….

(A) data to be carried at high operating rates.

(B) interoperability of optical transmission between interexchange carriers and telephone companies
(C) routing of data to the home

(D) interconnection of private networks

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.109 The number of bytes of overhead in a Sonet frame is ….

(A) 90

(B) 9

(D) 87

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.110 The number of OC-1 signals within an SONET OC-3 signal is….

(A) 3

(B) 6

(D) 12

Hide Answer

Ans . A

Q.111 In the current frequency assignments, how many frequency bands are there for the uplink frequencies?

(A) 16

(B) 8

(D) 2

Hide Answer

Ans . C

Q.112 The bandwidth required to send 132 voice-grade channels by FDM on an international satellite system is….

(A) 500 MHz

(B) 10 MHz

(C) 1320 MHz

(D) 50 MHz

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.113 The capability to provide consumers with video-on-demand.

(A) will-occur by the year 2000.

(B) depends on the results of field trials

(C) is based on fiber to the home

(D) is based on the use of satellites

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.114 Communications protocols always have a ….

(A) set of symbols

(B) the start of header

(C) the special Flag symbol

(D) BCC

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.115 In the X MODEM protocol, the sender waits for what character from the receiver before beginning transmissi
on?

(A) WACK

(B) ACK

(D) NAK

Hide Answer

Ans . D
Q.116 If each character in an X MODEM block has an ASC II value of 50, what would be the value of the checksu
m added to the block?

(C) uses 64-byte blocks

(D) requires a manual setup’

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.120 An example of a sliding windows protocol is….

(A) XMODEM

(B) YMODEM
(C) YMODEM-G

(D) WXMODEM

Hide Answer

Ans . D
Q.121 Auto dialing allows:

(A) to dial phone numbers by typing them on the keyboard

(B) a personal computer to answer incoming calls without human assistance

(C) both (A) and (B)

(D) None of these

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q. 122 If we get both local and remote echoes, every character we type will appear on the screen.

(A) once

(B) twice

(C) three times

(D) none of these

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.123 Synchronous protocols.

(A) transmit characters one at a time.

(B) allow faster transmission than asynchronous protocols do.

(C) are generally used by personal computers.

(D) all of these

Ans . A
Q.129 The economics of computing dictates….

(A) sharing peripherals and data

(B) giving processers to people who need processing time and instantaneous response

(C) both (A) and (B)

(D) all of these

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.130 To connect a computer to a device in the same room, we might be likely to use a….

(A) coaxial cable

(B) dedicated line

(C) ground station

(D) all of these

Hide Answer

Ans . A

Q.131 Many low-speed channels are interwove into one high-speed transmission by…..

(A) time-division multiplexer

(B) frequency-division multiplexer

(C) both (A) and (B)

(D) none of these

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.132 A central computer surrounded by one or more satellite computers is called.

(A) bus network

(B) ring network

(C) star network

(D) none of these

Hide Answer
Ans . C
Q.133 The most flexibility how devices are wired together is provided by…

(A) bust networks

(B) ring networks

(C) star networks

(D) T-switched networks

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.134 A network that requires human intervention to route signals is called.

(A) bus network

Ans . D
Q.137 A local area network….

(A) that connects thirty personal computers can provide more computing power than a minicomputer.

(B) cannot become bogged down like a mainframe if the load is too high..

(C) both (A) and (B)

(D) none of these.

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.138 The cheapest modems can transmit…..

(A) 300 bits per second

(B) 1200 bits per second

(C) 2400 bits per second

(D) none of these

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.139 Terminal emulation allows….

(A) a dumb terminal to pretend that it is a personal computer.

(B) a personal computer to pretend that it is a computer terminal

(C) a dumb terminal to produce a local echo

(D) both (A) and (B)

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.140 Sending a file from personal computer’s primary memory or disks to another computer is called..

(A) uploading

(B) downloading

(D) none of these

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.141 Users use often.........for access to mainframe or supercomputer

(A) terminal

(B) node

(D) hand held

(E) None of these

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.142 To create a............personal computer can cannot together.

(A) server

(B) super computer

(D) network

(E) None of these

Hide Answer

Ans . D
Q.143 What is used to identify whether a data word has an odd or even number of 1's?

(A) Cary bit

(B) Zero bit

(C) Parity bit

(D) Sign bit

(E) None of these

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.144 A combination of hardware and software, which provides facilities sending and rationing of information betw
een computer devices

(A) Network

(B) Peripheral

(C) Expansion slot

(D) Digital device

(E) None of these

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.145 Server is a computer which provides resources other computers commuted in a ............

(A) network

(B) mainframe

(C) super computers

(D) clients

(E) None of these

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.146 LAN, WAN and MAN are computer networks covering different are Their first alphabets L, W and M respec
tively stand for

(A) Local, Wide and Metropolitan

(B) Long, Wireless and Metropolitan

(C) Local, world and Middle

(D) Least, Wireless and Maximum

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.147 In.......topology, network comments are connected by only one cable

(A) Star

(B) Ring

(D) Mesh

(E) Mixed

Hide Answer

Ans . C

Q.148 Which of the following is used for modulation and demodulation?

(A)Modem

(B)Protocols

(C)Gateway

(D)Multiplexer

(E) None of these

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.149 On the large scale, geographically spreaded LAN's office are connected by using

(A) CAN

(B) LAN

(D) WAN

(E) TAN

Hide Answer

Ans . D
Q.150 Which of following is a small single site network

(A) LAN

(B) DSL

(D) USB

(E) CPU

Hide Answer

Ans . A

Q.151 Computer connected with LAN......

(A) work fast

(B) go online

(C) can e-mail

(D) can share information or peripheral devices

(E) None of these

Hide Answer

Ans . D
Q.152 LAN is useful for.......

(A) railway

(B) bank

(D) transport

(E) None of these

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.153 Telephone broadcast is an example of..........transmission.

(A) Simplex

(B) Half duplex

(C) Full duplex

(D) Automatic

(E) None of these

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.154 A parity bit is :

(A) used to indicate upper case letters

(B) the last bit in a byte

(C) the first bit in a byte

(D) use to detect errors

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.155 The first computer network of the world is.........

(A) I net
(B) NSF net

(D) V net

(E) None of these

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Q.156 Which of the following techniques needs source device and destination device in line of sight for data transfe
r?

(A) LAN

(B) Bluetooth

(D) Infrared

(E) All

Hide Answer

Ans . D
Q.157 When more computers are connected at one place, it is called

(A) LAN

(B) WAN

(D) WON

(E) DON

Hide Answer

Ans . A
Q.158 Bank's ATM facility is an example of.........

(A) LAN

(B) WAN

(C) Mixed networking

(D) Multipurpose

(E) None of these

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.159 Which of the following is not of the same group?

(A) Internet

(B) Apple talk

(D) Ring

(E) None of these

Hide Answer

Ans . B
Q.160 WAN is not useful for -

(A) Ministry of Foreign affair

(B) Foreign banks

(D) Airport

(E) None of these

Hide Answer

Ans . C
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-6 A+ A
A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-6-2

1
. Protocols in which the sender sends one frame and then waits for an
acknowledgement before proceeding are called __________
sliding window.
stop and wait.
frame buffer.
analog.

B. stop and wait.

2
. The data link layer takes the packet it gets from the network layer and
encapsulates them into ___________
cells
frames
packet
trailer

B. frames
3
. The data link layer takes the packets from _____ and encapsulates them
into frames for transmission.
network layer
physical layer
transport layer
application layer

A. network layer
4
. Which one of the following task is not done by data link layer?
framing
error control
flow control
channel coding

D. channel coding
5
. Protocols in which the sender waits for a positive acknowledgement
before advancing to the next data item are often called ___________
ARQ
PPR
1/3
ARS
PRP

A. ARQ
6
. The commonly used protocol for webpage transfer is ________
HTML
HTTP
WML
WTTP

B. HTTP
7
. The frames which are intimated for receiving are called ________
sending window.
receiving window
sender
receiver

B. receiving window
8
. The analysis which helps in checking whether the protocol is correct is
_________
reachability
correctness
reliability
redundancy

A. reachability
9
. The IP address of a system can be known using the DOS command
_______
ipconfir
ipconfig
ipconf
ipnum

B. ipconfig
10
. Datagrams using header extension are called __________
payload
trailer
datagram packets
jumbograms

D. jumbograms
2/3
3/3
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-5 A+ A
A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-5

1
. If a computer on the network shares resources for others to use, it is
called _____
server
client
mainframe
microcomputer

A. server
2
. For large networks _____ topology is used.
bus
ring
star
irregular

C. star
3
. X.25 is an example of __________ network.
packet switched
circuit switched
frame relay
ring based

A. packet switched
4
. What is the maximum length of STP?
100 ft
200ft
100m
200m

D. 200m
5
. ISDN is an example of _______ network.
packet switched
circuit switched
frame relay
ring based

1/3
B. circuit switched
6
. What is the maximum data capacity of STP?
10 mbps
100 mbps
1000 mbps
10000 mbps

B. 100 mbps
7
. In ______ topology if the computer cable is broken, networks get down
bus
ring
star
irregular

A. bus
8
. Terminators are used in ________ topology.
bus
ring
star
irregular

A. bus
9
. ________ layer decides which physical path the data should take.
Network
Transport
Physical
Data Link

C. Physical
10
. Print server uses spool which is a ______ that holds data before it is send
to the printer.
queue
buffer
node
ring

B. buffer

2/3
3/3
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-5 A+ A
A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-5

1
. If a computer on the network shares resources for others to use, it is
called _____
server
client
mainframe
microcomputer

2
. For large networks _____ topology is used.
bus
ring
star
irregular

3
. X.25 is an example of __________ network.
packet switched
circuit switched
frame relay
ring based

4
. What is the maximum length of STP?
100 ft
200ft
100m
200m

5
. ISDN is an example of _______ network.
packet switched
circuit switched
frame relay
ring based

6
. What is the maximum data capacity of STP?
1/3
10 mbps
100 mbps
1000 mbps
10000 mbps

7
. In ______ topology if the computer cable is broken, networks get down
bus
ring
star
irregular

8
. Terminators are used in ________ topology.
bus
ring
star
irregular

9
. ________ layer decides which physical path the data should take.
Network
Transport
Physical
Data Link

10
. Print server uses spool which is a ______ that holds data before it is send
to the printer.
queue
buffer
node
ring

You may be interested in:

Data Communication and Networking MCQs by Behrouz A Forouzan.
Computer Networking MCQs
Fundamental of Networking Online Tests
Data Communication and Networking Online Tests
Data Communication and Networking Short Questions Answers
Data Communication and Networking Tutorials and Study Notes

2/3
3/3
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-4 A+ A
A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-4

1
. Network of networks is known as _________
intranet
internet
Local Area Network
WAN

B. internet
2
. An interconnection of ________________________ computers is
called an Internet
Distributed
Co-Ordinated
Autonomous
Integrated

C. Autonomous
3
. When a packet with the code is transmitted, it is received and processed by
every machine on the network. This mode of operation is called
broadcasting
multi casting
unicasting
point-to-point

A. broadcasting
4
. point-to-point transmission with one sender and one receiver is
sometimes called ________
multicasting
unicasting
personal area network
LAN

B. unicasting
5
. The entities comprising the corresponding layers on different machine are
called ________
protocol
peers
1/3
interface
flow control

B. peers
6
. When the packets are small and all the same size, they are often called
________
packet switched
cells
circuit switched
virtual circuit

B. cells
7
. A collection of interconnected networks is called as __________
internet
intranet
topology
interface

A. internet
8
. Starting around 1988, the more advanced ______ twisted pairs were
introduced.
category3
category5
category8.
category10

B. category5
9
. Each ray is said to have a different mode, so a fiber having this property is
called ________
unimode
singlemode
multimode
triplemode

C. multimode
10
. The number of oscillations per second of a wave is called its ______
wavelength
frequency
spectrum
sequence

2/3
B. frequency

3/3
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-3 A+ A
A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-3

1
. How many frames are included for traffic in 26TDMA frames
1
24
25
16

B. 24
2
. What is the port number of the HTTP
80
25
23
20/21

A. 80
3
. What is the port number of the SMTP
25
23
20/21
27960

A. 25
4
. TCP is ______________
Connection-oriented
Reliable
Both a & b
None of these

C. Both a & b
5
. Which is a network protocol that is based on UDP and is a component of
the Internet Protocol Suite, defined by IETF(Internet Engineering Task
Force)
SNMP
Scalability
Screening
Multicasting
1/3
A. SNMP
6
. In X.25 defines the protocols from
Layer 2 to Layer 3
Layer 1 to Layer 2
Layer 1 to Layer 3
Layer 3 to Layer 2

C. Layer 1 to Layer 3
7
. Advantages of cell relay are
High-speed transmission
Multiplexing transmission
Both a & b
None of these

C. Both a & b
8
. When compared with the OSI reference model, the IEEE standard
contains the following layers:
Physical layer
Medium access control(MAC) equivalent to the lower part of the OSI data link
layer
Logical link layer(LAC) equivalent to the upper part of the data link layer
Network layer, the OSI network layer, that performs some of the higher order
layer functions
All of these

E. All of these
9
. In a token ring, the stations are connected to the __________
Logical ring
Physical ring
Both a & b
None of these

A. Logical ring
10
. A _________ preamble is used to synchronize the receiver’s clock
Four-byte
Three-byte
Two-byte
One-byte

D. One-byte

2/3
3/3
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-2 A+ A
A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-2

1
. Which protocol layer uses the protocols are WWW, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, e-
mail etc
Application Layer Protocol
Transport Layer Protocol
Internet Layer Protocol
Hardware Layer

A. Application Layer Protocol

2
. The internetworking protocol is known as
SMTP
PPP
TCP/IP
NNTP

C. TCP/IP
3
. If single computer network is divided into segments and router are added
between them it forms an
Internet
Internetwork
Network
Internetworking

B. Internetwork
4
. Check sum is used for
Error correction
Error detection
Both a & b
None of these

B. Error detection
5
. The type of packet format supported by X.25 are as follows
Control packet
Data packet
Both a & b
None of these
1/3
C. Both a & b
6
. ISDN stands for
Integrated Service Digital Network
Interaction System Digital Network
Inexpensive System Digital Network
None of these

A. Integrated Service Digital Network

7
. If routing information is automatically updated by routers when changes
are made to the network configuration are called
Fixed routing
Dynamic routing
Both a & b
Distributed routing

B. Dynamic routing
8
. ARP stands for
Address Resolution Protocol
Address Routing Protocol
Address Routing Packet
Address Routing Program

A. Address Resolution Protocol

9
. If two or more routers are connected to the same subnet, the network
administration determines which of the routers the messages should be
sent to eliminate this problem._____ are used
MAC messages
ICMP messages
INDP messages
IMCP messages

B. ICMP messages
10
. If two or more routers are available in distributed routing, which route
should be selected
High possible cost
Least possible cost
Link cost
Both b & c

C. Link cost

2/3
3/3
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-1 A+ A
A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-1

1
. A computer network permits sharing of
Resources
Information
Both a & b
None of these

C. Both a & b
2
. The first operational computer network in the world was the _________
for the United States Department of Defense
ARPANET
ERNET
SKYNET
DARPANET

A. ARPANET
3
. ATM stands for
Automatic taller machine
Automated teller machine
Automatic transfer machine
Automated transfer machine

B. Automated teller machine

4
. _______ is the technology that connects the machines and people within
a site in a small area
LAN
MAN
WAN
None of these

A. LAN
5
. ______ is a network that covers geographic areas that are larger, such as
districts or cities
LAN
1/3
MAN
WAN
None of these

B. MAN
6
. ______ is a network that this technology connects sites that are in diverse
locations
LAN
MAN
WAN
None of these

C. WAN
7
. ______ is a collection of point-to-point links that may form a circle
LAN
MAN
WAN
Ring topology

D. Ring topology
8
. The ISDN Internetworking Equipment devices are
Terminal Adapters(TAs)
ISDN Bridges
ISDN Routers
All of these

D. All of these
9
. ATM networks are
connectionless
Interconnected
connection oriented
None of these

C. connection oriented
10
. DHCP stands for
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Digital Host Communication Provider
Digital Host Communication Protocol
Dynamic Host Configuration Provider

A. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

2/3
3/3
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-16 A+
A A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-16

1
. The _______ houses the switches in token ring.
NIC
9-pin connector
MAU
transceiver

C. MAU
2
. The 4 byte IP address consists of
network address
host address
both (a) and (b)
none of the above

C. both (a) and (b)

3
. _____________ specifies a star topology featuring a central hub and
unshielded twisted-pair wire as the medium.
10 Base 2.
10 Base 5
10 Base T
10 Base 8

C. 10 Base T
4
. physical layer provides
mechanical specifications of electrical connectors and cables
electrical specification of transmission line signal level
specification for IR over optical fiber
all the above

D. all the above

5
. The most efficient medium for ATM is _____________
twisted pair
optical fiber
coaxial cable
the atmosphere

1/3
B. optical fiber
6
. Which of the following is a wrong example of network layer?
IP – ARPANET
X.25 PLP-ISO.
X.25 PLP-ISO.
X.25 level2 ISO

D. X.25 level2 ISO

7
. When a light beam moves to a less dense medium, the angle of refraction
is _______ the angle of incidence.
greater than
equal to
less than
less than equal to

A. greater than
8
. Which transmission media has the highest transmission speed in a
network?
coaxial cable
twisted pair cable
optical fiber
electrical cable

C. optical fiber
9
. 10 Base 5 uses the _______ cable.
thick coaxial
thin coaxial
twisted pair
fiber optic

A. thick coaxial
10
. When talking about unguided media, usually it is referred to
metallic wires
metals
the atmosphere
nonmetallic wires

C. the atmosphere

2/3
3/3
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-15 A+
A A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-15

1
. In the domain name chal.atc.fhda.edu _______ is the most specific label.
chal
atc
edu
fhda

A. chal
2
. In the domain name chal.atc.fhda.edu ________ is the least specific label.
chal
atc
edu
fhda

C. edu
3
. Identify the Odd term among the following group.
Optical Fiber
Twisted Pair.
Coaxial Cable.
Microwaves

D. Microwaves
4
. Which is not an example for analog communication __________ .
microwave
laser beam
voice grade telephone line
Light Wave

D. Light Wave
5
. Which one of the following is a transport layer protocol used in internet?
TCP
UDP
both (a) and (b)
none of the above

C. both (a) and (b)

1/3
6
. Which among the following is not a guided transmission media?
Optical Fiber
Twisted Pair
Coaxial Cable
Microwaves

D. Microwaves
7
. A sub division of main storage created by operational software is referred
to as ________
compartment
time-shared program
divided core
partition

D. partition
8
. An example of a medium- speed, switched communications service is
_________
Series 1000
Dataphone 50
DDD
Default

B. Dataphone 50
9
. In address-to-name resolution the _______ domain is used.
inverse
generic
country
reverse

A. inverse
10
. Which of the following is an advantage to using fiber optics data
transmission?
Resistance to data theft
Fast data transmission rate
Low noise level
Few transmission errors

C. Low noise level

2/3
3/3
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-14 A+
A A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-14

1
. In ______ routing, the destination address is a network address in the
routing tables.
next-hop
host-specific
network-specific.
default

C. network-specific.
2
. The ________ flag indicates the availability of a router.
up
host specific
gateway
added by redirection.

D. added by redirection.
3
. For a direct delivery, the ________ flag is on.
Up
host specific
Gateway
added by redirection.

C. Gateway
4
. The process of converting analog signals into digital signals so they can be
processed by a receiving computer is referred to as __________
synchronizing
demodulation
modulation
default

B. demodulation
5
. User datagram protocol is called connectionless because
all UDP packets are treated independently by transport layer
it sends data as a stream of related packets
both (a) and (b)
none of the above
1/3
A. all UDP packets are treated independently by transport layer
6
. Which of the following does not allow multiple users or devices to share
one communication line?
Doubleplexer
Concentrator
Multiplexer
Controller

A. Doubleplexer
7
. After coding a document into a digital signal, it can be sent by telephone,
telex or satellite to the receiver where the signal is decoded and an exact
copy of the original document is made. What is it called?
Telex
Electronic mail.
Facsimile
Word processor

C. Facsimile
8
. Videotex is a combination of _______
computer technology.
television
computers
all of the above

D. all of the above

9
. Usually it takes 10 bits to represent one character. How many characters
can be transmitted at a speed of 1200 bps?
10
12
20
1200

B. 12
10
. Who invented the modem?
Wang Laboratories.
AT & T.
Apple computers.
Satyam conferencing.

B. AT & T.

2/3
You may be interested in:
Data Communication and Networking MCQs by Behrouz A Forouzan.
Computer Networking MCQs
Fundamental of Networking Online Tests
Data Communication and Networking Online Tests
Data Communication and Networking Short Questions Answers
Data Communication and Networking Tutorials and Study Notes

3/3
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-13 A+
A A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-13

1
. When a direct delivery is made, both the deliverer and receiver have the
same _______
routing table.
host id
IP address
netid

D. netid
2
. When was Modem invented and in which country?
1963, USA.
1965,Germany.
1950, USA.
1950, Japan.

C. 1950, USA.
3
. Different computers are connected to a LAN by a cable and a/an _______
special wires.
interface card.
modem
telephone lines.

B. interface card.
4
. A modem is connected in between a telephone line and a ________
network
computer
communication adapter.
serial port

C. communication adapter.
5
. The word telematics is a combination of _________
computer
telecommunication
informatics
(b) and (c).

1/3
D. (b) and (c).
6
. Which of the following data transmission media has the largest terrestrial
range without the use of repeaters or other devices?
Hardwiring
Satellite
Microwave
Laser

B. Satellite
7
. An ROP would be attached to a _________
simplex channel.
duplex channel.
half duplex channel
full duplex channel

A. simplex channel.
8
. A batch processing terminal would not include a ________
CPU
card punch.
card reader
line printer

A. CPU
9
. A hard copy would be prepared on a ________
line printer
typewriter terminal
plotter
All of the above

D. All of the above

10
. Transmission of computerized data from one location to another is called
__________
data flow
data transfer.
data communication.
data management

C. data communication.

2/3
3/3
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-12 A+
A A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-12

1
. What is the host IP of a system having the IP address 192.0.0.10?
192
0.10
0.0.10
192.0

C. 0.0.10
2
. Which of the following TCP/IP protocol is used for remote terminal
connection service?
TELNET
RARP
FTP
UDP

A. TELNET
3
. The protocol used for transferring files from one system to another is
_________
TELNET
RARP
FTP
UDP

C. FTP
4
. The physical layer is responsible for
line coding
channel coding
modulation
all the above

D. all the above

5
. The TCP/IP protocol used for file transfer with minimal capability and
minimal overhead _______
RARP
FTP
TFTP
1/3
TELNET

C. TFTP
6
. What destination address can be used to send a packet from a host with IP
address 188.1.1.1 to all hosts on the network __________
188.0.0.0.
255.255.255.255.
0.0.0.0.
1.2.3.

B. 255.255.255.255.
7
. A subset of a network that includes all the routers but contains no loops is
called
spanning tree
spider structure
spider tree
none of the above

A. spanning tree
8
. Which one of the following algorithm is not used for congestion control?
traffic aware routing
admission control
load shedding
none of the above

D. none of the above

9
. Which transmission mode is used for data communication along
telephone lines?
Parallel
Serial
Synchronous
Asynchronous

B. Serial
10
. Which of the following device copies electrical signals from one Ethernet
to another?
Bridge
Repeater
Hub
Passive hub.

2/3
B. Repeater

3/3
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-11 A+
A A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-11

1
. A form of modulation in which the amplitude of a carrier wave is varied in
accordance with some characteristics of the modulating signal, is known as
___________
angle modulation
aloha
amplitude modulation
modem

C. amplitude modulation
2
. Modulation in which two binary values are represented by two different
amplitudes of the carrier frequency is known as ___________
amplitude shift keying
amplitude
amplitude modulation
aloha

A. amplitude shift keying

3
. The simultaneous transmission of data to a number of stations is known
as ____________
broadcast
bandwidth
analog transmission
aloha

A. broadcast
4
. Which layer of OSI determines the interface of the system with the user?
Network
Application
Data link
Physical

B. Application
5
. Which of the following condition is used to transmit two packets over a
medium at the same time?
Synchronous
1/3
Collision
Contention
Asynchronous

B. Collision
6
. Which of the following summation operation is performed on the bits to
check an error-detecting code?
Codec
Coder-decoder
Checksum
Attenuation

C. Checksum
7
. Frame relay operates in the _________
application, presentation
session, transport
physical, data link
data link, network

C. physical, data link

8
. Repeaters function in the ________ layers
application, presentation
session, transport
physical, data link
data link, network

C. physical, data link

9
. Which of the following is not a connecting device?
Bridge
Gateway
Transceiver
Hub

C. Transceiver
10
. Which layer in the network supports Gateways?
Lower 3
Upper 4
All 7 Layers
All but the physical layer

C. All 7 Layers
2/3
3/3
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-10 A+
A A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-10

1
. In an optical fiber the inner core is ______ the cladding.
more dense than
the same density as
less than dense
another name for

A. more dense than

2
. The inner core of an optical fiber is _____ in composition.
glass or plastic
bimetallic
copper
liquid

A. glass or plastic
3
. Bits can be send over guided and unguided media as analog signal by
digital modulation
amplitude modulation
frequency modulation
phase modulation

A. digital modulation
4
. The radio communication spectrum is divided into bands based on
___________
amplitude
cost and hardware
frequency
transmission media.

C. frequency
5
. When a beam of light travels through media of two different densities, if
the angle of incidence is greater than the critical angle, ______ occurs.
reflection
refraction
incidence
criticism
1/3
A. reflection
6
. In a noisy environment, the best transmission medium would be
_________
twisted pair
optical fiber
coaxial cable
the atmosphere

B. optical fiber
7
. What is the frequency range used for FM radio transmission?
Low frequency: 30 KHz to 300 MHz.
Very Low Frequency : 0 Hz to 30 Hz.
High frequency : 3 MHz to 30 MHz.
Very High Frequency : 30 MHz to 300 MHz.

D. Very High Frequency : 30 MHz to 300 MHz.

8
. End-to-end connectivity is provided from host-to-host in _________
session layer
presentation layer.
transport layer
network layer

C. transport layer
9
. The portion of physical layer that interfaces with the media access control
sublayer is called
physical signalling sublayer
physical data sublayer
physical address sublayer
none of the mentioned

A. physical signalling sublayer

10
. PSS was introduced in the year ________
1961
1971
1981
1991

C. 1981

2/3
3/3
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-9 A+ A
A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-9

1
. What is the main function of the transport layer?
Node-To-Node Delivery
Process-To-Process Message Delivery
Synchronization
Updating And Maintenance Of Routing Tables

B. Process-To-Process Message Delivery

2
. Session layer checkpoints _____
allow just a portion of a file to be resent
control the addition of the headers
detect and recover errors
are involved in dialog control

A. allow just a portion of a file to be resent

3
. To deliver a message to the correct application program running on a host
, the _______ address must be consulted.
port
IP
physical
tunnel

A. port
4
. When a host on network A sends a message to a host on network B, which
address does the router look at?
Port
Physical
IP
Tunnel

C. IP
5
. Which of the following is possible in a taken passing bus network?
In-service expansion
Unlimited number of stations
Unlimited distance
Limited distance
1/3
A. In-service expansion
6
. One important characteristics of the hub architecture of ARC-net is
directionalized transmission
access control and addressing
multiple virtual networks
alternative routing.

A. directionalized transmission
7
. What is the main purpose of a data link content mirror?
To detect problems in protocol
To determine the type of switching used in a data link
To determine the type of transmission used in a data link
To determine the flow of data.

A. To detect problems in protocol

8
. Which of the following is not a standard synchronous communication
protocol?
SDLC
SLIP
SMTP
PAS

D. PAS
9
. IPV6 has _____ bit addresses.
32
4
128
variable

C. 128
10
. In fiber optics,the signal source is ______ waves.
light
infrared
radio
very low frequency.

A. light

2/3
3/3
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-8 A+ A
A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-8

1
. Which of the following divides the high speed signal into frequency bands?
T switch
Time division multiplexer
Frequency Division Multiplexer
Code Division Multiplexer

C. Frequency Division Multiplexer

2
. Sending a file from users personal computers, primary memory or disk to
another computer is called
uploading
hang on.
logging on
downloading

A. uploading
3
. In OSI network architecture the dialogue control and token management
are responsibilities of ________
session layer
network layer
transport layer
data link layer

A. session layer
4
. Which one of the following is not a function of network layer?
routing
inter-networking
congestion control
none of the above

D. none of the above

5
. The interactive transmission of data within a time sharing system may be
best suited to __________
half duplex
simplex lines
biflex lines
1/3
full duplex lines

A. half duplex
6
. How many OSI layers are covered in the X.25 standard?
3
2
7
6

A. 3
7
. The third layer of OSI model is _____
physical layer.
data link layer
network layer
transport layer.

C. network layer
8
. The X.25 standard specifies a _________
technique for start stop data
technique for dial access
DTE/DCE interface
data bit rate

C. DTE/DCE interface
9
. Which of the following signals is not standard RS-232-C signal?
VDR
CTS
RTS
DSR

A. VDR
10
. What is the minimum number of wires needed to send data over a serial
communication link layer?
1
2
4
6

B. 2

2/3
3/3
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-7 A+ A
A-
examradar.com/data-communication-networking-mcqs-set-7

1
. Modulation is the process of ________
sending a file from one computer to another computer
converts digital signals to analog signals
converting analog signals to digital signals
echoing every character that is received

D. echoing every character that is received

2
. Which one of the following is a data link protocol?
ethernet
point to point protocol
HDLC
all the above

D. all the above

3
. Which of the following is used for modulation and demodulation?
Modem
Protocols
Gateway
Multiplexer

A. Modem
4
. A software that allows a personal computer to pretend it as a terminal is
_______
auto dialing
bulletin board
modem
terminal emulation

D. terminal emulation
5
. Which sublayer of the data link layer performs data link functions that
depend upon the type of medium?
logical link control sublayer
media access control sublayer
network interface control sublayer
none of the mentioned
1/3
B. media access control sublayer
6
. Which layer of OSI model is responsible for creating and recognizing
frame boundaries?
Physical layer
Data link layer.
Transport layer
Network layer

B. Data link layer.

7
. If digital data rate of 9600 bps is encoded using 8 – level phase shift keying
(PSK) method, the modulation rate is ______
1200 bands
3200 bands
4800 bands
9600 bands

C. 4800 bands
8
. Four bits are used for packet sequence numbering in a sliding window
protocol. What is the maximum window size?
4
8
15
16

C. 15
9
. Header of a frame generally contains
synchronization bytes
addresses
frame identifier
all the above

D. all the above

10
. The ________ model shows how the network functions of a computer
ought to be organized.
CCITT
OSI
ISO
ANSI

B. OSI

2/3
3/3
12/2/2020 MCQ Test Result

Your MCQ's Quiz Result

Home  (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/index.html) Review & check your result

Hi, User

Quiz Title - MCQ's on Data Communication & Networks

Score : 13 Questions are Correct Out of 51.

 25.5%  74.5%

Back to Quizzes Try Again Review Your Quiz Questions/Answer

Quiz Title - MCQ'S ON DATA COMMUNICATION & NETWORKS

MCQ 1 :
Frames from one LAN can be transmitted to another LAN via the device

Router

Bridge Correct answer

Repeater Wrong answer

Modem

MCQ 2 :
Which of the following condition is used to transmit two packets over a medium at the same time?

Contention

Collision Correct answer

Synchronous

Asynchronous

MCQ 3 :
Bluetooth is an example of ______________________.

personal area network Correct answer

https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/result-diaplay.php 1/14
12/2/2020 MCQ Test Result

local area network

virtual private network

wide area network

MCQ 4 :
What is the default subnet mask for a class C network?

127.0.0.1 Wrong answer

255.0.0.0

255.255.0.0

255.255.255.0 Correct answer

MCQ 5 :
How many hosts are attached to each of the local area networks at your site?

128 Wrong answer

256

254 Correct answer

MCQ 6 :

The physical layer is concerned with ______________.

bit-by-bit delivery Correct answer

process to process delivery

application to application delivery

port to port delivery

MCQ 7 :

Which of the following device is used to connect two systems, especially if the systems use di erent protocols?

Hub Wrong answer

Bridge

Gateway Correct answer

Repeater

https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/result-diaplay.php 2/14
12/2/2020 MCQ Test Result

MCQ 8 :
Transport layer is implemented in __________________.

End system Correct answer

NIC

Ethernet

Packet transport

MCQ 9 :

A remote batch-processing operation in which data is solely input to a central computer would require a

telegraph line Wrong answer

simplex lines Correct answer

mixedband channel

All of the above

MCQ 10 :
What is Unicode?

Represents symbol or characters used in any language Correct answer

Only few languages are supported

Supports only few characters Wrong answer

Characters from A to Z

MCQ 11 :

For data communications to occur, the communicating devices must be part of a communication system made up of a combination of?

WAN and LAN

Hardware and software Correct answer

Full duplex and half duplex

All of the above Wrong answer

MCQ 12 :

Data communications system depends on fundamental characteristics.

receiver

Sender

https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/result-diaplay.php 3/14
12/2/2020 MCQ Test Result

Timeliness Correct answer

Medium Wrong answer

MCQ 13 :
What are the 4 fundamental characteristics of a data communication

Receiver, Sender, Timeliness and Jitter

Receiver, Sender, Jitter and Medium

Delivery, Sender, Timeliness and Jitter

Delivery, Accuracy, Timeliness and Jitter Correct answer

MCQ 14 :

A data communications system has how many components

4 Correct answer

8 Wrong answer

MCQ 15 :

Select the correct cable that transport signals in the form of light

Twisted Pair Cable

Fiber Optic Cable Correct answer

Coaxial Cable

Shielded Twisted Pair Cable Wrong answer

MCQ 16 :
Twisted pair wires, coaxial cable, optical ber cables are the examples of.

Wired Media Correct answer

Wireless Media Wrong answer

Both A & B

None of the above

https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/result-diaplay.php 4/14
12/2/2020 MCQ Test Result

MCQ 17 :
Header of a frame generally contains ______________.

synchronization bytes

addresses Wrong answer

frame identi er

All of the above Correct answer

MCQ 18 :
CRC stands for _______________.

cyclic redundancy check Correct answer

code repeat check

code redundancy check

cyclic repeat check Wrong answer

MCQ 19 :
Which of the following is a data link protocol?

Ethernet

Point to point protocol

HDLC

All of the above Correct answer

MCQ 20 :

The network layer is concerned with ______________ of data

bits

frames

packets Correct answer

bytes Wrong answer

MCQ 21 :

Network layer rewall works as a _______________.

Frame lter

Packet lter Correct answer

https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/result-diaplay.php 5/14
12/2/2020 MCQ Test Result

Content lter

Virus lter Wrong answer

MCQ 22 :
A proxy rewall lters at _______________.

Physical layer

Data link layer

Network layer

Application layer Correct answer

MCQ 23 :

A packet lter rewall lters at _______________.

Physical layer

Data link layer Wrong answer

Network layer or Transport layer Correct answer

Application layer

MCQ 24 :
Which one of the following is not a function of network layer?

Routing

Inter-networking Wrong answer

Congestion control

Error control Correct answer

MCQ 25 :
A 4 byte IP address consists of _______________.

only network address

only host address Wrong answer

network address & host address Correct answer

network address & MAC address

https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/result-diaplay.php 6/14
12/2/2020 MCQ Test Result

MCQ 26 :
Which of the following routing algorithms can be used for network layer design?

shortest path algorithm

distance vector routing Wrong answer

link state routing

All of the above Correct answer

MCQ 27 :
Which network topology requires a central controller or hub?

Star Correct answer

Mesh Wrong answer

Ring

Bus

MCQ 28 :
_________________ topology requires a multipoint connection.

Star Wrong answer

Star

Ring

Bus Correct answer

MCQ 29 :
Data communication system spanning states, countries, or the whole world is ______________

LAN

WAN Correct answer

MAN

PAN Wrong answer

MCQ 30 :
Data communication system within a building or campus is___________________

LAN Correct answer

WAN

https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/result-diaplay.php 7/14
12/2/2020 MCQ Test Result

MAN Wrong answer

PAN

MCQ 31 :
WAN stands for ________________

World area network

Wide area network Correct answer

Web area network

Web access network

MCQ 32 :
Which of this is not a guided media?

Fiber optical cable

Coaxial cable

Wireless LAN Correct answer

Copper wire Wrong answer

MCQ 33 :

The HTTP request message is sent in ________________ part of three-way handshake

First

Second

Third Correct answer

Fourth Wrong answer

MCQ 34 :
In TCP, sending and receiving data is done as _______

Stream of bytes Correct answer

Sequence of characters

Lines of data Wrong answer

Packets

https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/result-diaplay.php 8/14
12/2/2020 MCQ Test Result

MCQ 35 :

Communication o ered by TCP is _______

Full-duplex Correct answer

Half-duplex

Semi-duplex

Byte by byte Wrong answer

MCQ 36 :
FTP is built on _____ architecture.

Client-server Correct answer

P2P

Data centric Wrong answer

Service oriented

MCQ 37 :
Identify the incorrect statement regarding FTP.

FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol

FTP uses two parallel TCP connections Wrong answer

FTP sends its control information in-band Correct answer

FTP sends exactly one le over the data connection

MCQ 38 :
The size of an IP address in IPv6 is _________

4 bytes

128 bits Correct answer

8 bytes

100 bits

MCQ 39 :
Which among the following features is present in IPv6 but not in IPv4?

Fragmentation Wrong answer

Header checksum

https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/result-diaplay.php 9/14
12/2/2020 MCQ Test Result

Options

Anycast address Correct answer

MCQ 40 :
Which of this is not a class of IP address?

Class E

Class C

Class D

Class F Correct answer

MCQ 41 :
Which of the following are transport layer protocols used in networking?

TCP and FTP Wrong answer

UDP and HTTP

TCP and UDP Correct answer

HTTP and FTP

MCQ 42 :
A _______________ is a TCP name for a transport service access point.

port Correct answer

pipe

node

protocol

MCQ 43 :
A _________________ is a device that forwards packets between networks by processing the routing information included in the packet.

bridge Wrong answer

rewall

router Correct answer

HUB

https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/result-diaplay.php 10/14
12/2/2020 MCQ Test Result

MCQ 44 :
The number of layers in ISO OSI reference model is _______________.

6 Wrong answer

7 Correct answer

MCQ 45 :
Which of the following layers is an addition to OSI model when compared with TCP IP model?

Application layer

Presentation layer

Session layer Wrong answer

Session and Presentation laye Correct answer

MCQ 46 :
Application layer is implemented in _________________.

End system Correct answer

NIC

Ethernet Wrong answer

Packet transport

MCQ 47 :

ATM and frame relay are ________________.

virtual circuit networks Correct answer

datagram networks

virtual private networks

virtual public networks Wrong answer

MCQ 48 :

An interconnected collection of piconet is called __________________.

scatternet Correct answer

micronet

https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/result-diaplay.php 11/14
12/2/2020 MCQ Test Result

mininet

multinet Wrong answer

MCQ 49 :
Which of the following is false with respect to TCP?

Connection-oriented

Process-to-process

Transport layer protocol

Unreliable Correct answer

MCQ 50 :

Bluetooth is the wireless technology for _______________.

local area network

personal area network Correct answer

metropolitan area network

wide area network Wrong answer

MCQ 51 :
Which of the following tasks is not done by data link layer?

framing

error control

ow control

channel coding Correct answer

Engineering MCQ Practice Series

Software Engineering MCQs (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/software-engineering-multiple-choice-questions.php)

PHP Programming Language MCQs (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/php-multiple-choice-questions.php)

Operating System MCQs (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/operating-system-multiple-choice-questions.php)

Network Security & Cryptography MCQs (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/network-security-multiple-choice-questions.php)

HTML Web Technologies MCQs (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/html-web-technologies-programming-language-multiple-choice-questions.php)

Dot Net MCQs (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/dot-net-multiple-choice-questions.php)

Data Communication and Networks MCQs (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/data-communication-networks-multiple-choice-questions.php)

https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/result-diaplay.php 12/14
12/2/2020 MCQ Test Result

Popular Questions
Newton’s laws of motion (https://knowledgeuniverseonline.com/question/newtons-laws-of-motion/)asked by Dr. Mukesh Shrimali
Process of nutrition in Amoeba (https://knowledgeuniverseonline.com/question/process-of-nutrition-in-amoeba/)asked by Rajiv
Sharma
Importance of studying physics subject in school after 10th (https://knowledgeuniverseonline.com/question/importance-of-studying-
physics/)asked by Rajiv
Refraction Through Prism in Di erent Medium (https://knowledgeuniverseonline.com/question/refraction-through-prism-in-di erent-
medium/)asked by Kirti Sharma
Ratio and Proportion Question asked by Education Desk (https://knowledgeuniverseonline.com/question/ratio-and-proportion-
question/)
Explain all the 12 tenses with example (https://knowledgeuniverseonline.com/question/what-is-tenses/) asked by Qwerty
Refraction Through Prism in Di erent Medium (https://knowledgeuniverseonline.com/question/refraction-through-prism-in-di erent-
medium/)asked by Seema Shrimali

NTSE Physics Course (Class 9 & 10) (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/ntse/Physics/index.php)

NTSE Chemistry Course (Class 9 & 10) (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/ntse/Chemistry/index.php)

NTSE Geography Course (Class 9 & 10) (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/ntse/Geography/index.php)

NTSE Biology Course (Class 9 & 10) (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/ntse/Biology/index.php)

NTSE Democratic Politics Course (Class 9 & 10) (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/ntse/Democratic-Politics/index.php)

NTSE Economics Course (Class 9 & 10) (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/ntse/Economics/index.php)

NTSE History Course (Class 9 & 10) (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/ntse/History/index.php)

NTSE Mathematics Course (Class 9 & 10) (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/ntse/Mathematics/index.php)

Test Preparation

 Geography (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/ntse/Geography/)
 Economics (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/ntse/Economics/)
 Mathematics (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/ntse/Mathematics/)
 History (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/ntse/History/)
 Physics (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/ntse/Physics/)
 Chemistry (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/ntse/Chemistry/)

Quick Links

 About Us (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/about.php)
 Advertise With Us (mailto:[email protected])
 Online Examination Section (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/login.php)
 CBSE Sample Paper Download (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/download-sample-papers-CBSE-RBSE-10th-12th.php)
 School Projects Download (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/download-project-CBSE-RBSE-10th-12th.php)
 Model Sample Papers Download (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/test/physics-model-paper1-NCERT-2016.php)
 Class 12 Practicals with Solutions (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/download-practical- le-pdf.php)

Products

 Student Solutions (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/#)

 Teacher Solutions (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/login.php)
 Corporate Solutions (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/)

https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/result-diaplay.php 13/14
12/2/2020 MCQ Test Result

Social Platform

Online Courses

 N T S E (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/ntse/index.php)
 N E E T (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/#)
 I I T (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/iit/Physics/index.php)
 Olyampad (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/ntse/index.php)
 Other Competative Exams (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/#)

© 2018 Knowledge Universe Online (https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/index.php) All rights reserved

https://www.knowledgeuniverseonline.com/mcq/result-diaplay.php 14/14
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Data Communication and Networking Basic MCQ Set –

behrouz A forouzan.

In this section of Data Communication and Networking – Data

Communication and Networking Basics MCQ (multiple choice)
Based Short Questions and Answers ,it cover the below lists of
topic, All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have
been compiled from the books of Data Communication and
Networking by The well known author behrouz A forouzan.

1. Data communications system MCQs.

2. Simplex, half-duplex, or full-duplex MCQs.
3. Topology MCQs.
4. Local area network (LAN), Metropolitan-area network (MAN),
Wide area network (WAN) MCQs.
5. Internet service providers (ISPs) MCQs.

Data Communication and Networking Basics MCQ Set – 1

1. The _______ is the physical path over which a message travels.

A. Protocol
B. Medium
C. Signal
D. All the above

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

2. The information to be communicated in a data communications

system is the _______.
A. Medium
B. Protocol
C. Message
D. Transmission

3. Frequency of failure and network recovery time after a failure

are measures of the _______ of a network.
A. Performance
B. Reliability
C. Security
D. Feasibility

4. An unauthorized user is a network _______ issue.

A. Performance
B. Reliability
C. Security
D. All the above

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

5. Which topology requires a central controller or hub?

A. Mesh
B. Star
C. Bus
D. Ring

6. Which topology requires a multipoint connection?

A. Mesh
B. Bus
C. Ring
D. Star

7. Communication between a computer and a keyboard involves

_____________ transmission.
A. simplex
B. half-duplex
C. full-duplex
D. automatic

8. A television broadcast is an example of _______ transmission.

A. simplex
B. half-duplex
C. full-duplex
D. automatic
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

9. _______ connection provides a dedicated link between two

devices.
A. point-to-point
B. multipoint
C. primary
D. secondary

10. In a _______ connection, more than two devices can share a

single link.
A. point-to-point
B. multipoint
C. primary
D. secondary

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer: Medium
Q-2 Correct Answer: Message
Q-3 Correct Answer: Reliability
Q-4 Correct Answer: Security
Q-5 Correct Answer: Star
Q-6 Correct Answer: Bus
Q-7 Correct Answer: simplex
Q-8 Correct Answer: simplex
Q-9 Correct Answer: point-to-point
Q-10 Correct Answer: Multipoint

Data Communication and Networking Basics MCQ Set – 2

1. In _______ transmission, the channel capacity is shared by both

communicating devices at all times.
A. simplex
B. half-duplex
C. full-duplex
D. half-simplex

2. In the original ARPANET, _______ were directly connected

together.
A. IMPs
B. host computers
C. networks
D. routers

3. This was the first network.

A. CSNET
B. NSFNET
C. ANSNET
D. ARPANET
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. Which organization has authority over interstate and

international commerce in the communications field?
A. ITU-T
B. IEEE
C. FCC
D. ISOC

5. _______ are special-interest groups that quickly test, evaluate,

and standardize new technologies.
A. Forums
B. Regulatory agencies
C. Standards organizations
D. All of the above

6. Which agency developed standards for physical connection

interfaces and electronic signaling specifications?
A. EIA
B. ITU-T
C. ANSI
D. ISO

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. ______ is the protocol suite for the current Internet.
A. TCP/IP
B. NCP
C. UNIX
D. ACM

8. ______ refers to the structure or format of the data, meaning the

order in which they are presented.
A. Semantics
B. Syntax
C. Timing
D. All of the above

9. ________ defines how a particular pattern to be interpreted, and

what action is to be taken based on that interpretation.
A. Semantics
B. Syntax
C. Timing
D. None of the above

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

10 . _______ refers to two characteristics: when data should be sent

and how fast it can be sent.
A. Semantics
B. Syntax
C. Timing
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer: full-duplex
Q-2 Correct Answer: IMPs
Q-3 Correct Answer: ARPANET
Q-4 Correct Answer: FCC
Q-5 Correct Answer: Forums
Q-6 Correct Answer: EIA
Q-7 Correct Answer: TCP/IP
Q-8 Correct Answer: Syntax
Q-9 Correct Answer: Semantics
Q-10 Correct Answer: Timing

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Data Communication and Networking Basics MCQ Set – 3

1. Data flow between two devices can occur in a _______ way.

A. simplex
B. half-duplex
C. full-duplex
D. all of the above

2. In a ______ connection, two and only two devices are connected

by a dedicated link.
A. multipoint
B. point-to-point
C. (a) and (b)
D. none of the above

3. In a ________ connection, three or more devices share a link.

A. multipoint
B. point-to-point
C. (a) and (b)
D. none of the above

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. ______ refers to the physical or logical arrangement of a

network.
A. Data flow
B. Mode of operation
C. Topology
D. None of the above

5. Devices may be arranged in a _____ topology

A. mesh
B. ring
C. bus
D. all of the above

6. A _______ is a data communication system within a building,

plant, or campus, or between nearby buildings.
A. MAN
B. LAN
C. WAN
D. none of the above

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. A ______ is a data communication system spanning states,

countries, or the whole world.
A. MAN
B. LAN
C. WAN
D. none of the above

8. ________ is a collection of many separate networks

A. A WAN
B. An internet
C. a LAN
D. None of the above

9. There are ______________ Internet service providers.

A. local
B. regional
C. national and international
D. all of the above

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

10. A ________ is a set of rules that governs data communication.

A. forum
B. protocol
C. standard
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer: all of the above
Q-2 Correct Answer: point-to-point
Q-3 Correct Answer: multipoint
Q-4 Correct Answer: Topology
Q-5 Correct Answer: all of the above
Q-6 Correct Answer: LAN
Q-7 Correct Answer: WAN
Q-8 Correct Answer: An internet
Q-9 Correct Answer: all of the above
Q-10 Correct Answer: protocol

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Downloaded from www.examradar.com
1

Data Communication and Networking – Network Model MCQ

Set PDF – behrouz A forouzan

Data Communication and Networking – Network Model MCQ

(multiple choice) Based Questions and Answers PDF cover the
below lists of topic, All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer
(MCQs) have been compiled from the books of Data
Communication and Networking by The well known author
behrouz A forouzan.

1. Networking protocols Multiple Choice Question and Answe

Answer.
2. Network Models Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
3. Application layer Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
4. Transport layer Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
5. Physical layer Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
6. Data link layer Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
7. Network layer Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.

Network Model Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

(MCQ) Set-1

1. The Internet model consists of _______ layers.

A. Three
B. Five
C. Seven
D. Eight
Downloaded from www.examradar.com
2

2. The process-to-process
process delivery of the entire message is the
responsibility of the _______ layer.
A. Network
B. Transport
C. Application
D. Physical

3. The _______ layer is the layer closest to the transmission

medium.
A. Physical
B. Data link
C. Network
D. Transport

4. Mail services are available to network users through the _______

layer.
A. Data link
B. Physical
C. Transport
D. Application

5. As the data packet moves from the upper to the lower layers,
headers are _______.
A. Added
B. Removed
C. Rearranged
D. Modified
Downloaded from www.examradar.com
3

6. The _______ layer lies between the network layer and the
application layer.
A. Physical
B. Data link
C. Transport
D. None of the above

7. Layer 2 lies between the physical layer and the _______ layer.
A. Network
B. Data link
C. Transport
D. None of the above

8. When data are transmitted from device A to device B, the header

from A's layer 4 is read by B's _______ layer.
A. Physical
B. Transport
C. Application
D. None of the above

9. The _______ layer changes bits into electromagnetic signals.

A. Physical
B. Data link
C. Transport
D. None of the above

10. Which of the following is an application layer service?

Downloaded from www.examradar.com
4

A. Remote log-in
B. File transfer and access
C. Mail service
D. All the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :Five
Q-2 Correct Answer :Transport
Q-3 Correct Answer :Physical
Q-4 Correct Answer :Application
Q-5 Correct Answer :Added
Q-6 Correct Answer :Transport
Q-7 Correct Answer :Network
Q-8 Correct Answer :Transport
Q-9 Correct Answer :Physical
Q-10 Correct Answer :All the above

Network Model Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

(MCQ) Set-2

1. Why was the OSI model developed?

A. Manufacturers disliked the TCP/IP protocol suite
B. The rate of data transfer was increasing exponentially
Downloaded from www.examradar.com
5

C. Standards were needed to allow any two systems to

communicate
D. None of the above

2. The _______ model shows how the network functions of a

computer ought to be organized.
organized
A. CCITT
B. OSI
C. ISO
D. ANSI

3. The physical layer is concerned with the movement of _______

over the physical medium.
medium
A. programs
B. dialogs
C. protocols
D. bits

4. The OSI model consists of _______ layers.

A. three
B. five
C. seven
D. eight

5. In the OSI model, as a data packet moves from the lower to the
upper layers, headers are _______.
A. added
B. removed
C. rearranged
D. modified
Downloaded from www.examradar.com
6

6. In the OSI model, when data is transmitted from device A to

device B, the header from A's layer 5 is read by B's _______ layer.
A. physical
B. transport
C. session
D. presentation

7. In the OSI model, what is the main function of the transport

layer?
A. node-to-node
node delivery
B. process-to-process
process message delivery
C. synchronization
D. updating and maintenance of routing tables

8. In the OSI model, encryption and decryption are functions of the

________ layer.
A. transport
B. session
C. presentation
D. application

9. When a host on network A sends a message to a host on network

B, which address does the router look at?
A. port
B. logical
C. physical
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com
7

10. To deliver a message to the correct application program

running on a host, the _______ address must be consulted
consulted.
A. port
B. IP
C. physical
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :Standards were needed to
allow any two systems to communicate
Q-2 Correct Answer :OSI
Q-3 Correct Answer :bits
Q-4 Correct Answer :seven
Q-5 Correct Answer :removed
Q-6 Correct Answer :session
Q-7 Correct Answer :process-to-process
:process process message
delivery
Q-8 Correct Answer :presentation
Q-9 Correct Answer :logical
Q-10 Correct Answer :port
Downloaded from www.examradar.com
8

Network Model Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

(MCQ) Set-3

1. IPv6 has _______ -bit

bit addresses.
A. 32
B. 64
C. 128
D. variable

2. ICMPv6 includes _______

A. IGMP
B. ARP
C. RARP
D. a and b

3. The ______ layer is responsible for moving frames from one hop
(node) to the next.
A. physical
B. data link
C. transport
D. none of the above

4. The ______ layer adds a header to the packet coming from the
upper layer that includes the logical addresses of the sender and
receiver.
A. physical
B. data link
Downloaded from www.examradar.com
9

C. network
D. none of the above

5. The_________ layer is responsible for the delivery of a message

from one process to another.
another
A. physical
B. transport
C. network
D. none of the above

6. The Internetworking Protocol (IP) is a ________ protocol

A. reliable
B. connection-oriented
oriented
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

7. ______ is a process-to
to-process protocol that adds only port
addresses, checksum error control, and length information to the
data from the upper layer.
layer
A. TCP
B. UDP
C. IP
D. none of the above

8. _________ provides full transport layer services to applications.

A. TCP
B. UDP
C. ARP
Downloaded from www.examradar.com
10

D. none of the above

9. The ________ address, also known as the link address, is the

address of a node as defined by its LAN or WAN
A. port
B. physical
C. logical
D. none of the above

10. Ethernet uses a ______ physical address that is imprinted on

the network interface card (NIC)
A. 32-bit
B. 64-bit
C. 6-byte
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer :128
Q-2 Correct Answer :a and b
Q-3 Correct Answer :data link
Q-4 Correct Answer :network
Q-5 Correct Answer :transport
Q-6 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-7 Correct Answer :UDP
Q-8 Correct Answer :TCP
Q-9 Correct Answer :physical
Q-10 Correct Answer :6-byte
:6
Downloaded from www.examradar.com
11

Network Model Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

(MCQ) Set-4

1. A port address in TCP/IP is ______ bits long.

A. 32
B. 48
C. 16
D. none of the above

2. The ____ created a model called the Open Systems

Interconnection, which allows diverse systems to communicate.
A. OSI
B. ISO
C. IEEE
D. none of the above

3. The seven-layer _____ model provides guidelines for the

development of universally compatible networking protocols
protocols.
A. OSI
B. ISO
C. IEEE
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com
12

4. The physical, data link, and network layers are the ______
support layers.
A. user
B. network
C. both (a) and (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

5. The session, presentation, and application layers are the ____

support layers.
A. user
B. network
C. both (a) and (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

6. The _______ layer links the network support layers and the user
support layers.
A. transport
B. network
C. data link
D. session

7. The _______ layer coordinates the functions required to transmit

a bit stream over a physical medium.
A. transport
B. network
C. data link
D. physical
Downloaded from www.examradar.com
13

8. The _______ layer is responsible for delivering data units from

one station to the next without errors.
A. transport
B. network
C. data link
D. physical

9. The ______ layer is responsible for the source-to-destination

destination
delivery of a packet across multiple network links.
A. transport
B. network
C. data link
D. physical

10. The ________ layer is responsible for the process-to--process

delivery of the entire message.
message
A. transport
B. network
C. data link
D. physical
Downloaded from www.examradar.com
14

Answer key for MCQ SET- 4

Q-1 Correct Answer :16
Q-2 Correct Answer :ISO
Q-3 Correct Answer :OSI
Q-4 Correct Answer :network
Q-5 Correct Answer :user
Q-6 Correct Answer :transport
Q-7 Correct Answer :physical
Q-8 Correct Answer :data link
Q-9 Correct Answer :network
Q-10 Correct Answer :transport

Network Model Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

(MCQ) Set-5

1. The ______ layer establishes, maintains, and synchronizes the

interactions between communicating devices.
A. transport
B. network
C. session
D. physical
Downloaded from www.examradar.com
15

2. The _______ layer ensures interoperability between

communicating devices through transformation of data into a
mutually agreed upon format.
format
A. transport
B. network
C. data link
D. presentation

3. The _________ layer enables the users to access the network

A. transport
B. application
C. data link
D. physical

4. TCP/IP is a __ hierarchical protocol suite developed the

OSI model.
A. seven-layer;
layer; before
B. five-layer; before
C. six-layer; before
D. five-layer; after

5. The TCP/IP _______ layer is equivalent to the combined session,

presentation, and application layers of the OSI model
A. application
B. network
C. data link
D. physical
Downloaded from www.examradar.com
16

6. The ________ address, also known as the link address, is the

address of a node as defined by its LAN or WAN
A. physical
B. IP
C. port
D. specific

7. The ____ address uniquely defines a host on the Internet

A. physical
B. IP
C. port
D. specific

8. The_____ address identifies a process on a host

A. physical
B. IP
C. port
D. specific

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 5
Q-1 Correct Answer :session
Q-2 Correct Answer :presentation
Q-3 Correct Answer :application
Q-4 Correct Answer :five-layer;
:five before
Q-5 Correct Answer :application
Downloaded from www.examradar.com
17

Q-6 Correct Answer :physical

Q-7 Correct Answer :IP
Q-8 Correct Answer :port
Q-9
Q-10
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer have been compiled
from the books of Data Communication and Networking by The
well known author behrouz A forouzan.

Data Communication and Networking – Data and Signals multiple

choice based questions
uestions and answers pdf cover the below lists of
topic,

1. Data and signal Multiple Choice Question and Answer

Answer.
2. Amplitude, frequency, and phase Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.
3. Time-domain
domain graph plots Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.
4. Frequency-domain
domain graph plots Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.
5. Spectrum ,bandwidth of a signa Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.
6. Bit rate (number of bits per second) and bit interval (durat
(duration
of 1 bit) Multiple Choice Question and Answer.
Answer
7. Nyquist formula Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
8. Shannon capacity Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
9. Attenuation, distortion, and noise Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.
10. Throughput, propagation speed,
speed, and propagation time
,wavelength of a frequency Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.

Practice it now to sharpen your concept.

1. Before data can be transmitted, they must be

transformed to _______.

A. periodic signals
B. electromagnetic signals
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. aperiodic signals
D. low-frequency
frequency sine waves

2. A periodic signal completes one cycle in 0.001 s. What

is the frequency?

A. 1 Hz
B. 100 Hz
C. 1 KHz
D. 1 MHz

3. In a frequency-domain
domain plot, the horizontal axis
measures the ________.

A. peak amplitude
B. frequency
C. phase
D. slope

4. In a time-domain
domain plot, the horizontal axis is a measure of
________.

A. signal amplitude
B. frequency
C. phase
D. time

5. If the bandwidth of a signal is 5 KHz and the lowest

frequency is 52 KHz, what is the highest frequency?
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. 5 KHz
B. 10 KHz
C. 47 KHz
D. 57 KHz

6. What is the bandwidth of a signal that ranges from 1 MHz

to 4 MHz?

A. 4 MHz
B. 1 KHz
C. 3 MHz
D. none of the above

7. As frequency increases, the period ________.

A. decreases
B. increases
C. remains the same
D. doubles

8. Given two sine waves A and B, if the frequency of A is

twice that of B, then the period of B is ________ that of A.

A. one-half
B. twice
C. the same as
D. indeterminate from
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

9. A sine wave is ________.

A. periodic and continuous

B. aperiodic and continuous
C. periodic and discrete
D. aperiodic and discrete

10. If the maximum amplitude of a sine wave is 2 V, the

minimum amplitude is ________ V.

A. 2
B. 1
C. -2
D. between -2
2 and 2

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 1
Q-1 Correct Answer :electromagnetic signals
Q-2 Correct Answer :1 KHz
Q-3 Correct Answer :frequency
Q-4 Correct Answer :time
Q-5 Correct Answer :57 KHz
Q-6 Correct Answer :3 MHz
Q-7 Correct Answer :decreases
Q-8 Correct Answer :twice
Q-9 Correct Answer :periodic and continuous
Q-10 Correct Answer :-2
:

Data and Signals Multiple Choice Questions and Answers (MCQ)

Set-2
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

1. A signal is measured at two different points. The power

is P1 at the first point and P2 at the second point. The dB is 0.
This means ________.

A. P2 is zero
B. P2 equals P1
C. P2 is much larger than P1
D. P2 is much smaller than P1

2. ________ is a type of transmission impairment in which

the signal loses strength due to the resistance of the
transmission medium.
medium

A. Attenuation
B. Distortion
C. Noise
D. Decibel

3. ________ is a type of transmission impairment in which

the signal loses strength due to the different propagation
speeds of each frequency that makes up the signal
signal.

A. Attenuation
B. Distortion
C. Noise
D. Decibel

4. ________ is a type of transmission impairment in which an

outside source such as crosstalk corrupts a signal
signal.
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. Attenuation
B. Distortion
C. Noise
D. Decibel

5. When propagation speed is multiplied by propagation

time, we get the ________.

A. throughput
B. wavelength of the signal
C. distortion factor
D. distance a signal or bit has traveled

6. Data can be ________.

A. analog
B. digital
C. (a) or (b)
D. none of the above

7. _______ data are continuous and take continuous values.

A. analog
B. digital
C. (a) or (b)
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. _______ data have discrete states and take discrete

values.

A. Analog
B. Digital
C. (a) or (b)
D. None of the above

9. Signals can be ________

A. analog
B. digital
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

10. _____ signals can have an infinite number of values in a

range.

A. Analog
B. Digital
C. (a) or (b)
D. None of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 2
Q-1 Correct Answer :P2 equals P1
Q-2 Correct Answer :Attenuation
Q-3 Correct Answer :Distortion
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-4 Correct Answer :Noise

Q-5 Correct Answer :distance a signal or bit has
traveled
Q-6 Correct Answer :(a) or (b)
Q-7 Correct Answer :analog
Q-8 Correct Answer :Digital
Q-9 Correct Answer :either (a) or (b)
Q-10 Correct Answer :Analog

Data and Signals Multiple Choice Questions and Answers (MCQ)

Set-3

1. _______ signals can have only a limited number of values.

A. Analog
B. Digital
C. (a) or (b)
D. None of the above

2. Frequency and period are ______

A. inverse of each other

B. proportional to each other
C. the same
D. none of the above

3. _______is the rate of change with respect to time

time.

A. Amplitude
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. Time
C. Frequency
D. Voltage

4. _______ describes the position of the waveform relative to

time 0.

A. Frequency
B. Phase
C. Amplitude
D. Voltage

5. A sine wave in the ______ domain can be represented by

one single spike in the _____ domain.

A. time; frequency
B. frequency; time
C. time; phase
D. phase; time

6. A _________ sine wave is not useful in data

communications; we need to send a _______ signal.

A. composite; single-frequency
single
B. single-frequency;
frequency; composite
C. single-frequency;
frequency; double-frequency
double
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. The _____ of a composite signal is the difference between

the highest and the lowest frequencies contained in that
signal

A. frequency
B. period
C. bandwidth
D. amplitude

8. A(n)_________ signal is a composite analog signal with an

infinite bandwidth.

A. digital
B. analog
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

9. Baseband transmission of a digital signal is possible only

if we have a ____ channel

A. low-pass
B. bandpass
C. low rate
D. high rate

10. If the available channel is a ____ channel, we cannot send

a digital signal directly to the channel

A. low-pass
B. bandpass
C. low rate
D. high rate
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 3
Q-1 Correct Answer :Digital
Q-2 Correct Answer :inverse of each other
Q-3 Correct Answer :Frequency
Q-4 Correct Answer :Phase
Q-5 Correct Answer :time; frequency
Q-6 Correct Answer :single-frequency;
:single frequency; composite
Q-7 Correct Answer :bandwidth
Q-8 Correct Answer :digital
Q-9 Correct Answer :low-pass
Q-10 Correct Answer :bandpass
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by The well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This Data Communication and Networking – “Digital

Transmission” multiple choice Based Questions and Answers
PDF cover the below lists of topic.

1. Digital Transmission,parallel or serial in mode,asynchronous

serial transmission,synchronous serial transmission multiple
choice Based Questions and Answers.
Answers
2. Line coding methods,unipolar, polar, or bipolar multiple
choice Based Questions and Answers.
Answers
3. polar encoding methods , NRZ, RZ, Manchester, and
differential Manchester encoding multiple choice Based
Questions and Answers.
An
4. bipolar encoding method , AMI multiple choice Based
Questions and Answers.
Answers
5. Block coding methods, 4B/5B, 8B/10B, and 8B/6T multiple
choice Based Questions and Answers.
Answers
6. PCM (pulse code modulation),sampling, quantizing, and line
coding multiple choice Based Questions and Answers
Answers.
7. Nyquist theorem multiple choice Based Questions and
Answers.
8. Shannon capacity multiple choice Based Questions and
Answers.
9. Attenuation, distortion, and noise multiple choice Based
Questions and Answers.
Answers
10. Throughput, propagation speed, and propagation time
,wavelength of a frequency multiple choice Based Questions
and Answers.
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Digital Transmission multiple choice Questions and Answers

MCQ Set-1

1. Unipolar, bipolar, and polar encoding are types of _______

encoding.
A. line
B. block
C. NRZ
D. Manchester

2. _______ encoding has a transition at the middle of each

bit.
A. RZ
B. Manchester
C. Differential Manchester
D. All the above

3. _______ encoding has a transition at the beginning of each

0 bit.
A. RZ
B. Manchester
C. Differential Manchester
D. All the above

4. PCM is an example of _______ conversion.

A. digital-to-digital
B. digital-to-analog
C. analog-to-analog
D. analog-to-digital
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

5. If the frequency spectrum of a signal has a bandwidth of

500 Hz with the highest frequency at 600 Hz, what should be
the sampling rate, according to the Nyquist theorem?
A. 200 samples/s
B. 500 samples/s
C. 1000 samples/s
D. 1200 samples/s

6. The Nyquist theorem specifies the minimum sampling rate

to be_______.
A. equal to the lowest frequency of a signal
B. equal to the highest frequency of a signal
C. twice the bandwidth of a signal
D. twice the highest frequency of a signal

7. Which of the following encoding methods does not

provide for synchronization?
A. NRZ-L
B. RZ
C. NRZ-I
D. Manchester

8. Which encoding method uses alternating positive and

negative values for 1s?
A. NRZ-I
B. RZ
C. Manchester
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. AMI

9. Which quantization level results in a more faithful

reproduction of the signal?
A. 2
B. 8
C. 16
D. 32

10. Block coding can help in _______ at the receiver.

A. Synchronization
B. Error detection
C. Attenuation
D. (a) and (b)

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 1
Q-1 Correct Answer :line
Q-2 Correct Answer :All the above
Q-3 Correct Answer :Differential Manchester
Q-4 Correct Answer :analog-to-digital
:analog
Q-5 Correct Answer :1200 samples/s
Q-6 Correct Answer :twice the highest frequency of a
signal
Q-7 Correct Answer :NRZ-L
:NRZ
Q-8 Correct Answer :AMI
Q-9 Correct Answer :32
Q-10 Correct Answer :(a) and (b)
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Digital Transmission multiple choice Questions and Answers

MCQ Set-2

1. In _______ transmission, bits are transmitted

simultaneously, each across its own wire.
A. Asynchronous serial
B. Synchronous serial
C. Parallel
D. (a) and (b)

2. In _______ transmission, bits are transmitted over a single

wire, one at a time.
A. asynchronous serial
B. synchronous serial
C. parallel
D. (a) and (b)

3. In _______ transmission, a start bit and a stop bit frame a

character byte
A. asynchronous serial
B. synchronous serial
C. parallel
D. (a) and (b)

4. In asynchronous transmission, the gap time between bytes

is _______
A. fixed
B. variable
C. a function of the data rate
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. zero

5. ___________ conversion involves three techniques: line

coding, block coding, and scrambling.
A. Analog-to-digital
B. Digital-to-analog
C. Analog-to-analog
analog
D. Digital-to-digital

6. ________ is the process of converting digital data to a

digital signal.
A. Block coding
B. Line coding
C. Scrambling
D. None of the above

7. ______ provides redundancy to ensure synchronization

and inherent error detection.
A. Block coding
B. Line coding
C. Scrambling
D. None of the above

8. ________ is normally referred to as mB/nB coding; it

replaces each m-bit group with an n-bit group.
A. Block coding
B. Line coding
C. Scrambling
D. None of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

9. ________ provides synchronization without increasing the

number of bits.
A. Scrambling
B. Line coding
C. Block coding
D. None of the above

10. Two common scrambling techniques are ________

A. NRZ and RZ
B. AMI and NRZ
C. B8ZS and HDB3
D. Manchester and differential Manchester

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 2
Q-1 Correct Answer :Parallel
Q-2 Correct Answer :(a) and (b)
Q-3 Correct Answer :asynchronous serial
Q-4 Correct Answer :variable
Q-5 Correct Answer :Digital-to-digital
:Digital
Q-6 Correct Answer :Line coding
Q-7 Correct Answer :Block coding
Q-8 Correct Answer :Block coding
Q-9 Correct Answer :Scrambling
Q-10 Correct Answer :B8ZS and HDB3
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Digital Transmission multiple choice Questions and Answers

MCQ Set-3

1. The ________ mode provides synchronization for the

entire stream of bits must. In other words, it guarantees that
the data arrive at a fixed rate.
A. synchronous
B. asynchronous
C. isochronous
D. none of the above

2. A _________ digital signal includes timing information in

the data being transmitted.
A. self-synchronizing
synchronizing
B. self-modulated
C. self-transmitted
D. none of the above

3. In decoding a digital signal, the receiver calculates a

running average of the received signal power, called the
_______
A. baseline
B. base
C. line
D. none of the above

4. The most common technique to change an analog signal

to digital data is called __________.
A. PAL
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. PCM
C. sampling
D. none of the above

5. The first step in PCM is ________

A. quantization
B. modulation
C. sampling
D. none of the above

6. There are three sampling methods: __________

A. quantized, sampled, and ideal
B. ideal, sampled, and flat-top
flat
C. ideal, natural, and flat-top
flat
D. none of the above

7. _____ finds the value of the signal amplitude for each

sample; ____ finds the change from the previous sample.
A. DM; PCM
B. PCM; DM
C. DM; CM
D. none of the above

8. While there is (are) only _____ way(s) to send parallel data,

there is (are) three subclass(es) of serial transmission
A. one; two
B. two; three
C. one; three
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

9. In ______ transmission, we send 1 start bit (0) at the

beginning and 1 or more stop bits (1s) at the end of each
byte.
A. synchronous
B. asynchronous
C. isochronous
D. none of the above

10. In _________ transmission, we send bits one after

another without start or stop bits or gaps. It is the
responsibility of the receiver to group the bits.
A. synchronous
B. asynchronous
C. isochronous
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 3
Q-1 Correct Answer :isochronous
Q-2 Correct Answer :self-synchronizing
:self
Q-3 Correct Answer :baseline
Q-4 Correct Answer :PCM
Q-5 Correct Answer :sampling
Q-6 Correct Answer :ideal, natural, and flat
flat-top
Q-7 Correct Answer :PCM; DM
Q-8 Correct Answer :one; three
Q-9 Correct Answer :asynchronous
Q-10 Correct Answer :synchronous
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Digital Transmission multiple choice Questions and Answers

MCQ Set-4

1. The ________ rate defines the number of data elements

sent in 1s; the ______ rate is the number of signal elements
sent in 1s
A. data; signal
B. signal; data
C. baud; bit
D. none of the above

2. The signal rate is sometimes called the ____ rate

A. baud
B. bit
C. signal
D. none of the above

3. The data rate is sometimes called the ___ rate

A. baud
B. bit
C. signal
D. none of the above

4. In a _____ scheme, all the signal levels are on one side of

the time axis, either above or below.
A. polar
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. bipolar
C. unipolar
D. all of the above

5. In ______ schemes, the voltages are on the both sides of

the time axis. For example, the voltage level for 0 can be
positive and the voltage level for 1 can be negative.
A. polar
B. bipolar
C. unipolar
D. all of the above

6. In _____, the level of the voltage determines the value of

the bit.
A. NRZ-I
B. NRZ-L
C. both (a) and (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

7. In ______, the change or lack of change in the level of the

voltage determines the value of the bit.
A. NRZ-I
B. NRZ-L
C. both (a) and (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

8. The idea of RZ and the idea of NRZ-L are combined into

the ________ scheme.
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. Manchester
B. differential Manchester
C. both (a) and (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

9. The idea of RZ and the idea of NRZ-I are combined into the
________ scheme
A. Manchester
B. differential Manchester
C. both (a) and (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

10. In _______ encoding, the duration of the bit is divided

into two halves. The voltage remains at one level during the
first half and moves to the other level in the second half. The
transition at the middle of the bit provides synchronization.
A. Manchester
B. differential Manchester
C. both (a) and (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 4
Q-1 Correct Answer :data; signal
Q-2 Correct Answer :baud
Q-3 Correct Answer :bit
Q-4 Correct Answer :unipolar
Q-5 Correct Answer :polar
Q-6 Correct Answer :NRZ-L
:NRZ
Q-7 Correct Answer :NRZ-I
:NRZ
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-8 Correct Answer :Manchester

Q-9 Correct Answer :differential Manchester
Q-10 Correct Answer :both (a) and (b)

Digital Transmission multiple choice Questions and Answers

MCQ Set-5

1. In ___________ there is always a transition at the middle of

the bit, but the bit values are determined at the beginning of
the bit. If the next bit is 0, there is a transition; if the next bit
is 1, there is none.
A. Manchester
B. differential Manchester
C. both (a) and (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

2. In Manchester and differential Manchester encoding, the

transition at the middle of the bit is used for __________
A. bit transfer
B. baud transfer
C. synchronization
D. none of the above

3. The minimum bandwidth of Manchester and differential

Manchester is ____ that of NRZ.
A. the same as
B. twice
C. thrice
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

4. In _______encoding, we use three levels: positive, zero,

and negative
A. unipolar
B. bipolar
C. polar
D. none of the above

5. The _____ scheme uses data patterns of size 2 and

encodes the 2-bit patterns as one signal element belonging
to a four-level signal
A. 4B5B
B. 2B1Q
C. MLT-3
D. none of the above

6. The ______ scheme uses three levels (+V, 0, and -V) and
three transition rules to move between the levels.
A. 4B5B
B. 2B1Q
C. MLT-3
D. none of the above

7. _____ substitutes eight consecutive zeros with 000VB0VB

A. B4B8
B. HDB3
C. B8ZS
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. ______ substitutes four consecutive zeros with 000V or

B00V
A. B4B8
B. HDB3
C. B8ZSf
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 5
Q-1 Correct Answer :differential Manchester
Q-2 Correct Answer :synchronization
Q-3 Correct Answer :twice
Q-4 Correct Answer :bipolar
Q-5 Correct Answer :2B1Q
Q-6 Correct Answer :MLT-3
:MLT
Q-7 Correct Answer :B8ZS
Q-8 Correct Answer :HDB3
Q-9
Q-10
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by The well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – Analog
Transmission multiple choice Based Questions and Answers
PDF cover the below lists of topic.

1. Digital To Analog modulation multiple choice Based

Questions and Answers
2. Amplitude shift keying (ASK) multiple choice
ce Based
Questions and Answers.
Answers
3. Frequency shift keying (FSK) multiple choice Based
Questions and Answers.
Answers
4. Phase shift keying (PSK) multiple choice Based Questions
and Answers.
5. Quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM) multiple choice
Based Questions and Answers.
Answer
6. Analog to analog modulation multiple choice Based
Questions and Answers.
7. Amplitude modulation (AM) multiple choice Based Questions
and Answers.
8. Frequency modulation (FM) multiple choice Based
Questions and Answers.
9. Phase modulation (PM) multiple choice Based Questions
.and Answers.

Analog Transmission multiple choice Questions and Answers

MCQ Set-1

1. ASK, PSK, FSK, and QAM are examples of ________

conversion.
A. digital-to-digital
B. digital-to-analog
C. analog-to-analog
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. analog-to-digital

2. AM and FM are examples of ________ conversion.

A. digital-to-digital
B. digital-to-analog
C. analog-to-analog
D. analog-to-digital

3. In QAM, both ________ of a carrier frequency are varied.

A. frequency and amplitude
B. phase and frequency
C. amplitude and phase
D. none of the above

4. If the baud rate is 400 for a QPSK signal, the bit rate is
________ bps.
A. 100
B. 400
C. 800
D. 1600

5. If the bit rate for an ASK signal is 1200 bps, the baud rate
is ________.
A. 300
B. 400
C. 600
D. 1200
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

6. If the bit rate for an FSK signal is 1200 bps, the baud rate is
________.
A. 300
B. 400
C. 600
D. 1200

7. If the bit rate for a 16-QAM signal is 4000 bps, what is the
baud rate?
A. 300
B. 400
C. 1000
D. 1200

8. If the baud rate for a 64-QAM signal is 2000, what is the bit
rate?
A. 300
B. 400
C. 1000
D. 12000

9. Given an AM radio signal with a bandwidth of 10 KHz and

the highest-frequency
frequency component at 705 KHz, what is the
frequency of the carrier signal?
A. 700 KHz
B. 705 KHz
C. 710 KHz
D. Cannot be determined from given information

10. _______ conversion is the process of changing one of the

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

characteristics of an analog signal based on the information

in the digital data.
A. Digital-to-analog
B. Analog-to-analog
analog
C. Analog-to-digital
D. Digital-to-digital

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 1
Q-1 Correct Answer :digital-to-analog
:digital
Q-2 Correct Answer :analog-to-analog
Q-3 Correct Answer :amplitude and phase
Q-4 Correct Answer :800
Q-5 Correct Answer :1200
Q-6 Correct Answer :1200
Q-7 Correct Answer :1000
Q-8 Correct Answer :12000
Q-9 Correct Answer :700 KHz
Q-10 Correct Answer :Digital-to-analog

Analog Transmission multiple choice Questions and Answers

MCQ Set-2

1. Which of the following is not a digital-to-analog

conversion?
A. ASK
B. PSK
C. FSK
D. AM
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

2. In ________, the amplitude of the carrier signal is varied to

create signal elements. Both frequency and phase remain
constant.
A. ASK
B. PSK
C. FSK
D. QAM

3. In _________, the frequency of the carrier signal is varied

to represent data. Both peak amplitude and phase remain
constant.
A. ASK
B. PSK
C. FSK
D. QAM

4. In ________, the phase of the carrier is varied to represent

two or more different signal elements. Both peak amplitude
and frequency remain constant.
A. ASK
B. PSK
C. FSK
D. QAM

5. A constellation diagram shows us the __________ of a

signal element, particularly when we are using two carriers
(one in-phase and one quadrature).
A. amplitude and phase
B. amplitude and frequency
C. frequency and phase
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

6. Quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM) is a combination

of ___________
A. ASK and FSK
B. ASK and PSK
C. PSK and FSK
D. none of the above

7. ________ uses two carriers, one in-phase and the other

quadrature
A. ASK
B. PSK
C. FSK
D. QAM

8. ________ conversion is the representation of analog

information by an analog signal.
A. Digital-to-analog
B. Analog-to-analog
analog
C. Analog-to-digital
D. Digital-to-digital

9. Analog-to-analog conversion is needed if the available

bandwidth is _______
A. low-pass
B. band-pass
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

10. Which of the following is not an analog-to-analog

analog
conversion?
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. AM
B. PM
C. FM
D. QAM

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 2
Q-1 Correct Answer :AM
Q-2 Correct Answer :ASK
Q-3 Correct Answer :FSK
Q-4 Correct Answer :PSK
Q-5 Correct Answer :amplitude and phase
Q-6 Correct Answer :ASK and PSK
Q-7 Correct Answer :QAM
Q-8 Correct Answer :Analog-to-analog
:Analog
Q-9 Correct Answer :band-pass
:band
Q-10 Correct Answer :QAM

Analog Transmission multiple choice Questions and Answers

MCQ Set-3

1. In _____ transmission, the carrier signal is modulated so

that its amplitude varies with the changing amplitudes of the
modulating signal.
A. AM
B. PM
C. FM
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

2. In _____ transmission, the frequency of the carrier signal

is modulated to follow the changing voltage level (amplitude)
of the modulating signal. The peak amplitude and phase of
the carrier signal remain constant, but as the amplitude of
the information signal changes, the frequency of the carrier
changes correspondingly.
A. AM
B. PM
C. FM
D. none of the above

3. In _____ transmission, the phase of the carrier signal is

modulated to follow the changing voltage level (amplitude) of
the modulating signal.
A. AM
B. PM
C. FM
D. none of the above

4. In _______, the peak amplitude of one signal level is 0; the

other is the same as the amplitude of the carrier frequency
A. PSK
B. OOK
C. FSK
D. none of the above

5. How many carrier frequencies are used in BASK?

A. 2
B. 1
C. 0
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

6. How many carrier frequencies are used in BFSK?

A. 2
B. 1
C. 0
D. none of the above

7. How many carrier frequencies are used in BPSK?

A. 2
B. 1
C. 0
D. none of the above

8. How many carrier frequencies are used in QPSK?

2
A. 1
B. 0
C. none of the above

9. The constellation diagram of BASK has ______ dots

A. 2
B. 1
C. 0
D. none of the above

10. The constellation diagram of BPSK has ______ dots

A. 2
B. 1
C. 0
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 3
Q-1 Correct Answer :AM
Q-2 Correct Answer :FM
Q-3 Correct Answer :PM
Q-4 Correct Answer :OOK
Q-5 Correct Answer :1
Q-6 Correct Answer :2
Q-7 Correct Answer :1
Q-8 Correct Answer :2
Q-9 Correct Answer :2
Q-10 Correct Answer :2
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication
Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This Data Communication and Networking – Bandwidth

Utilization: Multiplexing and Spreading multiple choice based
questions and answers PDF cover the below lists of topic
topic.

1. Frequency division multiplexing (FDM) Multiple Choice

Question and Answer.
Answer
2. Wave division multiplexing (WDM) Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.
3. Time division multiplexing (TDM) Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.

Bandwidth Utilization: Multiplexing and Spreading multiple

choice questions and answers MCQ Set-1Set

1. The sharing of a medium and its link by two or more

devices is called _______.
A. modulation
B. encoding
C. line discipline
D. multiplexing

2. Which multiplexing technique transmits analog signals?

A. FDM
B. TDM
C. WDM
D. (a) and (c)

3. Which multiplexing technique transmits digital signals?

A. FDM
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. TDM
C. WDM
D. None of the above

4. Which multiplexing technique shifts each signal to a

different carrier frequency?
A. FDM
B. TDM
C. Both (a) and (b)
D. None of the above

5. In synchronous TDM, for n signal sources of the same data

rate, each frame contains _______ slots.
A. n
B. n + 1
C. n - 1
D. 0 to n

6. In TDM, the transmission rate of the multiplexed path is

usually _______ the sum of the transmission rates of the
signal sources.
A. greater than
B. less than
C. equal to
D. not related to

7. Which multiplexing technique involves signals composed

of light beams?
A. FDM
B. TDM
C. WDM
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. _________ utilization is the use of available bandwidth to

achieve specific goals.
A. Frequency
B. Bandwidth
C. Amplitude
D. None of the above

9. __ can be achieved by using multiplexing;

can be
achieved by using spreading.
A. Efficiency; privacy and antijamming
B. Privacy and antijamming; efficiency
C. Privacy and efficiency; antijamming
D. Efficiency and antijamming; privacy

10. _______ is the set of techniques that allows the

simultaneous transmission of multiple signals across a
single data link.
A. Demodulating
B. Multiplexing
C. Compressing
D. None of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 1
Q-1 Correct Answer :multiplexing
Q-2 Correct Answer :(a) and (c)
Q-3 Correct Answer :TDM
Q-4 Correct Answer :FDM
Q-5 Correct Answer :n
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-6 Correct Answer :greater than

Q-7 Correct Answer :WDM
Q-8 Correct Answer :Bandwidth
Q-9 Correct Answer :Efficiency; privacy and
antijamming
Q-10 Correct Answer :Multiplexing

Bandwidth Utilization: Multiplexing and Spreading multiple

choice questions and answers MCQ Set-2Set

1. In a multiplexed system, __ lines share the bandwidth of

____ link.
A. 1; n
B. 1; 1
C. n; 1
D. n; n

2. The word refers to the portion of a _ that

carries a transmission
A. channel; link
B. link; channel
C. line; channel
D. line; link

3. ______ can be applied when the bandwidth of a link (in

hertz) is greater than the combined bandwidths of the signals
to be transmitted.
A. TDM
B. FDM
C. Both (a) or (b)
D. Neither (a) or (b)
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. FSM is an _________technique
A. analog
B. digital
C. either (a) or (b)
D. none of the above

5. ____ is designed to use the high bandwidth capability of

fiber-optic cable.
A. FDM
B. TDM
C. WDM
D. None of the above

6. ______ is an analog multiplexing technique to combine

optical signals.
A. FDM
B. TDM
C. WDM
D. None of the above

7. _____ is a digital process that allows several connections

to share the high bandwidth of a link.
A. FDM
B. TDM
C. WDM
D. None of the above

8. ____ is a digital multiplexing technique for combining

several low-rate channels into one high-rate one
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. FDM
B. TDM
C. WDM
D. None of the above

9. We can divide ____ into two different schemes:

synchronous or statistical
A. FDM
B. TDM
C. WDM
D. none of the above

10. In ________ TDM, each input connection has an allotment

in the output even if it is not sending data.
A. synchronous
B. statistical
C. isochronous
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 2
Q-1 Correct Answer :n; 1
Q-2 Correct Answer :channel; link
Q-3 Correct Answer :FDM
Q-4 Correct Answer :analog
Q-5 Correct Answer :WDM
Q-6 Correct Answer :WDM
Q-7 Correct Answer :TDM
Q-8 Correct Answer :TDM
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-9 Correct Answer :TDM

Q-10 Correct Answer :synchronous
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This Data Communication and Networking – Transmission

Media Multiple
ultiple choice Questions and Answers (MCQ) PDF
covers the below lists of topics.
topic

1. Transmission media Multiple Choice Question and AnswerAnswer.

2. Twisted pair cable, coaxial cable, and optical fiber cable
Multiple Choice Question and Answer.
Answer
3. Multimode step-index
index propagation Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.
4. Multimode graded-index
graded propagation Multiple Choice
Question and Answer.
Answer
5. Unguided media – ground propagation, sky propagation, and
line-of-sight
sight propagation
propa Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.
6. Radio waves, Microwaves, or Infrared waves Multiple Choice
Question and Answer

Transmission Media multiple choice questions and answers MCQ

Set-1

1. Transmission media are usually categorized as _______.

A. fixed or unfixed
B. guided or unguided
C. determinate or indeterminate
D. metallic or nonmetallic

2. Transmission media lie below the _______ layer.

A. physical
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. network
C. transport
D. application

3. ______ cable consists of an inner copper core and a

second conducting outer sheath.
A. Twisted-pair
B. Coaxial
C. Fiber-optic
D. Shielded twisted--pair

4. In fiber optics, the signal is _______ waves.

A. light
B. radio
C. infrared
D. very low-frequency
frequency

5. Which of the following primarily uses guided media?

A. cellular telephone system
B. local telephone system
C. satellite communications
D. radio broadcasting

6. Which of the following is not a guided medium?

A. twisted-pair
pair cable
B. coaxial cable
C. fiber-optic cable
D. atmosphere
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. What is the major factor that makes coaxial cable less

susceptible to noise than twisted-pair cable?
A. inner conductor
B. diameter of cable
C. outer conductor
D. insulating material

8. In an optical fiber, the inner core is _______ the cladding.

A. denser than
B. less dense than
C. the same density as
D. another name for

9. The inner core of an optical fiber is _______ in

composition.
A. glass or plastic
B. copper
C. bimetallic
D. liquid

10. When a beam of light travels through media of two

different densities, if the angle of incidence is greater than
the critical angle, _______ occurs.
A. reflection
B. refraction
C. incidence
D. criticism

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 1
Q-1 Correct Answer :guided or unguided
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-2 Correct Answer :physical

Q-3 Correct Answer :Coaxial

Q-4 Correct Answer :light

Q-5 Correct Answer :local telephone system

Q-6 Correct Answer :atmosphere

Q-7 Correct Answer :outer conductor

Q-8 Correct Answer :denser than

Q-9 Correct Answer :glass or plastic

Q-10 Correct Answer :reflection

Transmission Media multiple choice questions and answers MCQ

Set-2

1. When the angle of incidence is _______ the critical angle,

the light beam bends along the interface.
A. more than
B. less than
C. equal to
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

2. Signals with a frequency below 2 MHz use _______

propagation.
A. ground
B. sky
C. line-of-sight
D. none of the above

3. Signals with a frequency between 2 MHz and 30 MHz use

______ propagation
A. ground
B. sky
C. line-of-sight
D. none of the above

4. Signals with a frequency above 30 MHz use

_______propagation
A. ground
B. sky
C. line-of-sight
D. none of the above

5. A parabolic dish antenna is a(n) _______ antenna.

A. omnidirectional
B. bidirectional
C. unidirectional
D. horn

6. A(n) _____ medium provides a physical conduit from one

device to another.
A. guided
B. unguided
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. either (a) or (b)

D. none of the above

7. ________ cable consists of two insulated copper wires

twisted together.
A. Coaxial
B. Fiber-optic
C. Twisted-pair
D. none of the above

8. _______ cable is used for voice and data communications.

A. Coaxial
B. Fiber-optic
C. Twisted-pair
D. none of the above

9. _________ consists of a central conductor and a shield.

A. Coaxial
B. Fiber-optic
C. Twisted-pair
D. none of the above

10. _____ cable can carry signals of higher frequency ranges

than _____ cable.
A. Twisted-pair;
pair; fiber-optic
fiber
B. Coaxial; fiber-optic
optic
C. Coaxial; twisted-pair
pair
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 2
Q-1 Correct Answer :equal to
Q-2 Correct Answer :ground
Q-3 Correct Answer :sky
Q-4 Correct Answer :line-of-sight
:line
Q-5 Correct Answer :unidirectional
Q-6 Correct Answer :unguided
Q-7 Correct Answer :Twisted-pair
:Twisted
Q-8 Correct Answer :Twisted-pair
:Twisted
Q-9 Correct Answer :Coaxial
Q-10 Correct Answer :Coaxial; twisted-pair
twisted

Transmission Media multiple choice questions and answers MCQ

Set-3

1. ______ cables are composed of a glass or plastic inner

core surrounded by cladding, all encased in an outside
jacket.
A. Coaxial
B. Fiber-optic
C. Twisted-pair
D. none of the above

2. ______ cables carry data signals in the form of light.

A. Coaxial
B. Fiber-optic
C. Twisted-pair
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

3. In a fiber-optic cable, the signal is propagated along the

inner core by _______
A. reflection
B. refraction
C. modulation
D. none of the above

4. _________ media transport electromagnetic waves without

the use of a physical conductor
A. Guided
B. Unguided
C. Either (a) or (b)
D. None of the above

5. Radio waves are _________

A. omnidirectional
B. unidirectional
C. bidirectional
D. none of the above

6. Microwaves are _________

A. omnidirectional
B. unidirectional
C. bidirectional
D. none of the above

7. _______ are used for cellular phone, satellite, and wireless

LAN communications.
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. Radio waves
B. Microwaves
C. Infrared waves
D. none of the above

8. ________ are used for short-range communications such

as those between a PC and a peripheral device.
A. Radio waves
B. Microwaves
C. Infrared waves
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 3
Q-1 Correct Answer :Fiber-optic
:Fiber
Q-2 Correct Answer :Fiber-optic
:Fiber
Q-3 Correct Answer :reflection
Q-4 Correct Answer :Unguided
Q-5 Correct Answer :omnidirectional
Q-6 Correct Answer :unidirectional
Q-7 Correct Answer :Microwaves
Q-8 Correct Answer :Infrared waves
Q-9
Q-10
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by The well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – Switching Network
multiple choice based
ased Questions and Answers (MCQ) PDF cover
the below lists of topic.

1. Switching methods Multiple Choice Question and Answer

Answer.
2. circuit switching Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
3. packet
acket switching Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
4. message switching Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
5. Space-division
division switch , Time-division
Time switches Multiple
Choice Question and Answer.
Answer

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. Traditionally, _____ methods of switching have been

important.
A. four
B. three
C. five
D. six

2. We can divide today's networks into ____ broad

categories.
A. four
B. three
C. five
D. two
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

3. Packet-switched networks can also be divided into

______subcategories: virtual-circuit networks and datagram
networks
A. four
B. three
C. two
D. five

4. A ________ network is made of a set of switches

connected by physical links, in which each link is divided
into n channels.
A. line-switched
B. frame-switched
C. circuit-switched
D. none of the above

5. Circuit switching takes place at the ________ layer.

A. data line
B. physical
C. network
D. transport

6. In _______, the resources need to be reserved during the

setup phase; the resources remain dedicated for the entire
duration of data transfer phase until the teardown phase.
A. datagram
ram switching
B. circuit switching
C. frame switching
D. none of the above

7. In _________, there is no resource allocation for a packet.

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. datagram switching
B. circuit switching
C. frame switching
D. none of the above

8. In _________, resources are allocated on demand.

A. datagram switching
B. circuit switching
C. frame switching
D. none of the above

9. In __________, each packet is treated independently of all

others.
A. datagram switching
B. circuit switching
C. frame switching
D. none of the above

10. In _______ there are no setup or teardown phases.

A. datagram switching
B. circuit switching
C. frame switching
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 1
Q-1 Correct Answer :three
Q-2 Correct Answer :three
Q-3 Correct Answer :two
Q-4 Correct Answer :circuit-switched
:circuit
Q-5 Correct Answer :physical
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-6 Correct Answer :circuit switching

Q-7 Correct Answer :datagram switching
Q-8 Correct Answer :datagram switching
Q-9 Correct Answer :datagram switching
Q-10 Correct Answer :datagram switching

Switching Network multiple choice questions and answers MCQ

Set-2

1. A _________ network is a cross between a circuit

circuit-switched
network and a datagram network. It has some characteristics
of both.
A. virtual-circuit
B. packet-switched
C. frame-switched
D. none of the above

2. We can say that a packet switch has _______ types of

components
A. two
B. three
C. four
D. none of the above

3. The simplest type of switching fabric is the ______ switch

A. crosspoint
B. crossbar
C. TSI
D. STS
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. A ________ switch is a multistage switch with

microswitches at each stage that route the packets based on
the output port represented as a binary string
A. crossbar
B. TSI
C. banyan
D. none of the above

5. In a banyan switch, for 8 inputs and 8 outputs, we have

_____ stages
A. 8
B. 4
C. 3
D. 2

6. In a banyan switch, for 8 inputs and 8 outputs, we have

_____ microswitches at each stage.
A. 8
B. 4
C. 3
D. 2

7. A ________ switch combines space-division and time-

division technologies to take advantage of the best of both.
A. TST
B. SSS
C. TTT
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. The most popular technology in time-division switching is

called the _________
A. STI
B. ITS
C. TSI
D. none of the above

9. Based on the Clos criteria, if N = 200, then n must be equal

to or greater than ____
A. 10
B. 20
C. 30
D. 40

10. Based on the Clos criteria, if N = 200, then k must be

equal to or greater than ____
A. 21
B. 19
C. 31
D. 41

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 2
Q-1 Correct Answer :virtual-circuit
:virtual
Q-2 Correct Answer :four
Q-3 Correct Answer :crossbar
Q-4 Correct Answer :banyan
Q-5 Correct Answer :3
Q-6 Correct Answer :4
Q-7 Correct Answer :TST
Q-8 Correct Answer :TSI
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-9 Correct Answer :10

Q-10 Correct Answer :19

Switching Network multiple choice questions and answers MCQ

Set-3

1. Based on the Clos criteria, if N = 200, then the minimum

number of crosspoints is greater than or equal to _______
A. 15,200
B. 18,000
C. 42,000
D. 20,000

2. In a one-stage space division switch, if N = 200, the

number of crosspoints is ______
A. 10,000
B. 20,000
C. 40,000
D. 30,000

3. In a three-stage space division switch, if N = 200, the

number of crosspoints is ______
A. 40,000
B. greater than 40,000
C. less than 40,000
D. greater than 100,000

4. A ________ switch combines crossbar switches in several

(normally three) stages
A. multistage
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. multiple crossbar
C. multiple path
D. none of the above

5. In _______ switching, the paths in the circuit are separated

from one another spatially
A. time-division
B. space-division
C. two-dimensional
D. three-dimensional
dimensional

6. A switched WAN is normally implemented as a _______

network
A. virtual-circuit
B. datagram
C. circuit-switched
D. none of the above

7. In a ________ network, two types of addressing are

involved: global and local
A. virtual-circuit
B. datagram
C. circuit-switched
D. none of the above

8. The network layer in the Internet is designed as a

__________ network
A. virtual-circuit
B. datagram
C. circuit-switched
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

9. A switch in a datagram network uses a routing table that is

based on the ______ address
A. source
B. destination
C. local
D. none of the above

10. The _______ address in the header of a packet in a

datagram network normally remains the same during the
entire journey of the packet
A. source
B. destination
C. local
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 3
Q-1 Correct Answer :15,200
Q-2 Correct Answer :40,000
Q-3 Correct Answer :less than 40,000
Q-4 Correct Answer :multistage
Q-5 Correct Answer :space-division
:space
Q-6 Correct Answer :virtual-circuit
Q-7 Correct Answer :virtual-circuit
:virtual
Q-8 Correct Answer :datagram
Q-9 Correct Answer :destination
Q-10 Correct Answer :destination
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by The well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – Telephone and
Cable Networks for Data Transmission multiple choice (MCQ)
based
ased Questions and Answers PDF cover the below lists of
topics.

1. DSL Multiple Choice Question and Answer.

Answer
2. ADSL technology Multiple Choice Question
tion and Answer
Answer.
3. SDSL, HDSL, and VDSL are other DSL technologies
Multiple Choice Question and Answer.
Answer
4. An HFC network,DOCSIS Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.
5. Synchronous Optical Network (SONET),STS
multiplexer,Regenerator ,Add/drop multiplexer Multiple
Choice Question and Answer.
Answer

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

2. The local loop has _______ cable that connects the

subscriber telephone to the nearest end office.
A. twisted-pair
B. coaxial
C. fiber-optic
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

3. Data from a computer are _______; the local loop handles

_______ signals.
A. analog; analog
B. analog; digital
C. digital; digital
D. digital; analog

4. _______ is suitable for businesses that require comparable

upstream and downstream data rates.
A. VDSL
B. ADSL
C. SDSL
D. (a) and (b)

5. DMT is a modulation technique that combines elements of

_______ and _______.
A. FDM; TDM
B. QDM; QAM
C. FDM; QAM
D. PSK; FSK

6. The largest portion of the bandwidth for ADSL carries

_______.
A. voice communication
B. upstream data
C. downstream data
D. control data
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. _______ was designed as an alternative to the T--1 line.

A. VDSL
B. ADSL
C. SDSL
D. HDSL

8. HDSL encodes data using _______.

A. 4B/5B
B. 2B1Q
C. 1B2Q
D. 6B/8T

9. Another name for the cable TV office is the _______.

A. splitter
B. fiber node
C. combiner
D. head end

10. A traditional cable TV network transmits signals ______.

A. upstream
B. downstream
C. upstream and downstream
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 1
Q-1 Correct Answer :circuit-switched
:circuit
Q-2 Correct Answer :twisted-pair
:twisted
Q-3 Correct Answer :digital; analog
Q-4 Correct Answer :SDSL
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-5 Correct Answer :FDM; QAM

Q-6 Correct Answer :downstream data
Q-7 Correct Answer :HDSL
Q-8 Correct Answer :2B1Q
Q-9 Correct Answer :head end
Q-10 Correct Answer :downstream

Telephone and Cable Networks for Data Transmission multiple

choice questions and answers MCQ Set-2
Set

1. In an HFC network, the downstream data are modulated

using the _______ modulation technique.
A. PSK
B. QAM
C. PCM
D. ASK

2. In an HFC network, the upstream data are modulated using

the _______ modulation technique
A. QAM
B. QPSK
C. PCM
D. ASK

3. The standard for data transmission over an HFC network is

called _______
A. MCNS
B. DOCSIS
C. CMTS
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. ADSL

4. The original telephone network, which is referred to as the

plain old telephone system (POTS), was an ________ system
A. digital
B. analog
C. digital as well as analog
D. none of the above

5. The modern telephone network is now ________

A. digital
B. analog
C. digital as well as analog
D. none of the above

6. The telephone network is made of ______ major

components
A. 2
B. 3
C. 4
D. none of the above

7. The United States is divided into many _______

A. LECs
B. LATAs
C. IXCs
D. none of the above

8. The carrier that handles intra-LATA services is called a(n)

_____
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. POP
B. IXC
C. LEC
D. none of the above

9. The carrier that handles inter-LATA services is called a(n)

_______
A. POP
B. IXC
C. LEC
D. none of the above

10. In ______signaling, the same circuit is used for both

signaling and data.
A. in-band
B. out-of-band
C. mixed
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 2
Q-1 Correct Answer :QAM
Q-2 Correct Answer :QPSK
Q-3 Correct Answer :DOCSIS
Q-4 Correct Answer :analog
Q-5 Correct Answer :digital as well as analog
Q-6 Correct Answer :3
Q-7 Correct Answer :LATAs
Q-8 Correct Answer :LEC
Q-9 Correct Answer :IXC
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-10 Correct Answer :in-band

:in

Telephone and Cable Networks for Data Transmission multiple

choice questions and answers MCQ Set-3
Set

1. In ________signaling, a portion of the bandwidth is used

for signaling and another portion for data.
A. in-band
B. out-of-band
C. mixed
D. none of the above

2. The protocol that is used for signaling in the telephone

network is called ______
A. POP
B. SSS
C. SS7
D. none of the above

3. Telephone companies provide two types of analog

services: analog _______ services and analog _____services
A. switched; in-band
band
B. out-of-band; in-band
band
C. switched; leased
D. leased; out-of-band
band

4. The two most common digital services are ________

service and ______
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. switched/56; switched/64
B. switched/56; DDS
C. DDS; swiched 64
D. leased; out-of-band
band

5. The term modem is a composite word that refers to the two

functional entities that make up the device: a signal _______
and a signal _______
A. modulator; demodulator
B. demodulator; modulator
C. modern; demo
D. none of the above

6. Most popular modems available are based on the

________standards
A. V-series
B. X-series
C. VX-series
D. none of the above

7. ______technology is a set of technologies develpoed by

the telephone companies to provide high data rate
transmission
A. ASL
B. DSL
C. LDS
D. none of the above

8. The traditional cable TV system used ________cable end

to end
A. twisted-pair
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. coaxial
C. fiber-optic
D. none of the above

9. The second generation of cable networks is called a(n)

_________ network
A. HFC
B. HCF
C. CFH
D. none of the above

10. The HFC network uses _______ cable

A. twisted-pair
B. coaxial
C. fiber-optic
D. a combination of (b) and (c)

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 3
Q-1 Correct Answer :out-of-band
:out
Q-2 Correct Answer :SS7
Q-3 Correct Answer :switched; leased
Q-4 Correct Answer :switched/56; DDS
Q-5 Correct Answer :modulator; demodulator
Q-6 Correct Answer :V-series
:V
Q-7 Correct Answer :DSL
Q-8 Correct Answer :coaxial
Q-9 Correct Answer :HFC
Q-10 Correct Answer :a combination of (b) and (c)
Downloaded from www.examradar.com
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by The well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This Data Communication and Networking – Error Detection and

Correction multiple choice (MCQ) based Questions and Answers
PDF cover the below lists of topics.
topic

1. Single-bit
bit error or a burst error Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.
2. Redundancy methods, parity check, cyclic redundancy
checks (CRC), and checksum Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.
3. Hamming code Multiple Choice Question and AnswerAnswer.

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. Which error detection method uses one's complement

arithmetic?
A. Simple parity check
B. Two-dimensional
dimensional parity check
C. CRC
D. Checksum

2. Which error detection method consists of just one

redundant bit per data unit?
A. Simple parity check
B. Two-dimensional
dimensional parity check
C. CRC
D. Checksum

3. In cyclic redundancy checking, what is the CRC?

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. The divisor
B. The quotient
C. The dividend
D. The remainder

4. In cyclic redundancy checking, the divisor is _______ the

CRC
A. The same size as
B. one bit less than
C. one bit more than
D. none of the above

5. A burst error means that two or more bits in the data unit
have changed.
A. double-bit
B. burst
C. single-bit
D. none of the above

6. In ________ error correction, the receiver corrects errors

without requesting retransmission.
A. backward
B. onward
C. forward
D. none of the above

7. In ________ error correction, the receiver asks the sender

to send the data again.
A. backward
B. retransmission
C. forward
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

8. We can divide coding schemes into two broad categories:

________ and ______coding.
A. block; linear
B. linear; nonlinear
C. block; convolution
D. none of the above

9. In modulo-2 arithmetic, __________ give the same results.

A. addition and multiplication
B. addition and division
C. addition and subtraction
D. none of the above

10. In modulo-2 arithmetic, we use the ______ operation for

both addition and subtraction.
A. XOR
B. OR
C. AND
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 1
Q-1 Correct Answer :Checksum
Q-2 Correct Answer :Simple parity check
Q-3 Correct Answer :The remainder
Q-4 Correct Answer :one bit more than
Q-5 Correct Answer :burst
Q-6 Correct Answer :forward
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-7 Correct Answer :retransmission

Q-8 Correct Answer :block; convolution
Q-9 Correct Answer :addition and subtraction
Q-10 Correct Answer :XOR

Error Detection and Correction multiple choice questions and

answers MCQ Set-2

1. In _____ coding, we divide our message into blocks, each

of k bits, called ___.
A. block; blockwords
B. linear; datawords
C. block; datawords
D. none of the above

2. We add r redundant bits to each block to make the length n

= k + r. The resulting n-bit blocks are called _________
A. datawords
B. blockwords
C. codewords
D. none of the above

3. The ________ between two words is the number of

differences between corresponding bits
A. Hamming code
B. Hamming distance
C. Hamming rule
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. To guarantee the detection of up to 5 errors in all cases,

the minimum Hamming distance in a block code must be
_______
A. 5
B. 6
C. 11
D. none of the above

5. To guarantee correction of up to 5 errors in all cases, the

minimum Hamming distance in a block code must be
________
A. 5
B. 6
C. 11
D. none of the above

6. In a linear block code, the _______ of any two valid

codewords creates another valid codeword
A. XORing
B. ORing
C. ANDing
D. none of the above

7. A simple parity-check
check code can detect __________ errors
A. an even-number
number of
B. two
C. no errors
D. an odd-number
number of
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. _______codes are special linear block codes with one

extra property. If a codeword is rotated, the result is another
codeword
A. Non-linear
B. Convolution
C. Cyclic
D. none of the above

9. The _of errors is more difficult than the __

A. correction; detection
B. detection; correction
C. creation;
ion; correction
D. creation; detection

10. In modulo-11 arithmetic, we use only the integers in the

range ______, inclusive
A. 1 to 10
B. 1 to 11
C. 0 to 10
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 2
Q-1 Correct Answer :block; datawords
Q-2 Correct Answer :codewords
Q-3 Correct Answer :Hamming distance
Q-4 Correct Answer :6
Q-5 Correct Answer :11
Q-6 Correct Answer :XORing
Q-7 Correct Answer :an odd-number
odd of
Q-8 Correct Answer :Cyclic
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-9 Correct Answer :correction; detection

Q-10 Correct Answer :0 to 10

Error Detection and Correction multiple choice questions and

answers MCQ Set-3

1. In modulo-2 arithmetic, we use only ______

A. 1 and 2
B. 0 and 2
C. 0 and 1
D. none of the above

2. Adding 1 and 1 in modulo-2

modulo arithmetic results in
_________
A. 1
B. 2
C. 0
D. none of the above

3. In block coding, if k =2 and n =3, we have _______ invalid

codewords
A. 8
B. 4
C. 2
D. none of the above

4. The Hamming distance between equal codewords is

_________
A. 1
B. n
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. 0
D. none of the above

5. The Hamming distance between 100 and 001 is ________

A. 2
B. 0
C. 1
D. none of the above

6. In block coding, if n = 5, the maximum Hamming distance

between two codewords is ________
A. 2
B. 3
C. 5
D. none of the above

7. If the Hamming distance between a dataword and the

corresponding codeword is three, there are _____ bits in
error.
A. 3
B. 4
C. 5
D. none of the above

8. The _______ of a polynomial is the highest power in the

polynomial
A. range
B. degree
C. power
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

9. The divisor in a cyclic code is normally called the

_________
A. degree
B. generator
C. redundancy
D. none of the above

10. A generator that contains a factor of ____ can detect all

odd-numbered errors.
A. x
B. x + 1
C. 1
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 3
Q-1 Correct Answer :0 and 1
Q-2 Correct Answer :0
Q-3 Correct Answer :4
Q-4 Correct Answer :0
Q-5 Correct Answer :2
Q-6 Correct Answer :5
Q-7 Correct Answer :3
Q-8 Correct Answer :degree
Q-9 Correct Answer :generator
Q-10 Correct Answer :x + 1
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books
book of Data Communication
ommunication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – Data Link Control
multiple choice (MCQ) basedased Questions and Answers PDF cover
the below lists of topics.
s.

1. Error control , error detection and error correction Multiple

Choice Question and Answer.
Answer
2. Stop-and-Wait
Wait ARQ Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
3. Go-Back-N N ARQ Multiple Choice Question and AnswerAnswer.
4. Selective Repeat ARQ Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.
5. Flow control mechanisms Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.
6. HDLC protocol Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. In a Go-Back-N ARQ, if the window size is 63, what is the

range of sequence numbers?
A. 0 to 63
B. 0 to 64
C. 1 to 63
D. 1 to 64

2. In Go-Back-N ARQ, if frames 4, 5, and 6 are received

successfully, the receiver may send an ACK _______ to the
sender.
A. 5
B. 6
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. 7
D. any of the above

3. ARQ stands for _______.

A. Automatic repeat quantization
B. Automatic repeat request
C. Automatic retransmission request
D. Acknowledge repeat request

4. For Stop-and-Wait ARQ, for 10 data packets sent, _______

acknowledgments are needed
A. exactly 10
B. less than 10
C. more than 10
D. none of the above

5. HDLC is an acronym for _______

A. High-duplex
duplex line communication
B. High-level
level data link control
C. Half-duplex
duplex digital link combination
D. Host double-level
level circuit

6. Data link control deals with the design and procedures for
______ communication
A. node-to-node
B. host-to-host
C. process-to-process
process
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. ______ in the data link layer separates a message from one

source to a destination, or from other messages going from
other sources to other destinations
A. Digitizing
B. Controlling
C. Framing
D. none of the above

8. In _______ framing, there is no need for defining the

boundaries of frames.
A. fixed-size
B. variable-size
C. standard
D. none of the above

9. In ________ framing, we need a delimiter (flag) to define

the boundary of two frames.
A. fixed-size
B. variable-size
C. standard
D. none of the above

10. _________framing uses two categories of protocols:

character-oriented and bit-oriented.
A. Fixed-size
B. Variable-size
C. Standard
D. None of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 1
Q-1 Correct Answer :0 to 63
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-2 Correct Answer :7

Q-3 Correct Answer :Automatic repeat request
Q-4 Correct Answer :exactly 10
Q-5 Correct Answer :High-level
:High level data link control
Q-6 Correct Answer :node-to-node
:node
Q-7 Correct Answer :Framing
Q-8 Correct Answer :fixed-size
:fixed
Q-9 Correct Answer :variable-size
:variable
Q-10 Correct Answer :Variable-size
:Variable

Data Link Control MCQ Set-2

Set

1. In a ________ protocol, the data section of a frame is a

sequence of characters.
A. bit-oriented
B. character-oriented
oriented
C. either (a) or (b)
D. none of the above

2. In a _________ protocol, the data section of a frame is a

sequence of bits.
A. byte-oriented
B. bit-oriented
C. either (a) or (b)
D. none of the above

3. In _ protocols, we use

A. character-oriented;
oriented; byte stuffing
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. character-oriented;
oriented; bit stuffing
C. bit-oriented;
oriented; character stuffing
D. none of the above

4. Byte stuffing means adding a special byte to the data

section of the frame when there is a character with the same
pattern as the ______
A. header
B. trailer
C. flag
D. none of the above

5. In protocols, we use

A. byte-oriented;
oriented; bit stuffing
B. character-oriented;
oriented; bit stuffing
C. bit-oriented;
oriented; bit stuffing
D. none of the above

6. Bit stuffing means adding an extra 0 to the data section of

the frame when there is a sequence of bits with the same
pattern as the ________
A. header
B. trailer
C. flag
D. none of the above

7. _______ control refers to a set of procedures used to

restrict the amount of data that the sender can send before
waiting for acknowledgment
knowledgment
A. Flow
B. Error
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. Transmission
D. none of the above

8. ____ control refers to methods of error detection and

correction
A. Flow
B. Error
C. Transmission
D. none of the above

9. The Simplest Protocol and the Stop-and-Wait Protocol are

for ______ channels
A. noisy
B. noiseless
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

10. The Stop-And-WaitWait ARQ, Go-Back-N ARQ, and the

Selective Repeat ARQ are for ______ channels
A. noisy
B. noiseless
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 2
Q-1 Correct Answer :character-oriented
Q-2 Correct Answer :bit-oriented
:bit
Q-3 Correct Answer :character-oriented;
:character oriented; byte stuffing
Q-4 Correct Answer :flag
Q-5 Correct Answer :bit-oriented;
:bit oriented; bit stuffing
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-6 Correct Answer :flag

Q-7 Correct Answer :Flow
Q-8 Correct Answer :Error
Q-9 Correct Answer :noiseles
Q-10 Correct Answer :noisy

Data Link Control MCQ Set-3

Set

1. The ____ Protocol has neither flow nor error control

A. Stop-and-Wait
B. Simplest
C. Go-Back-N ARQ
D. Selective-Repeat
Repeat ARQ

2. The _______Protocol has flow control, but not error

control
A. Stop-and-Wait
B. Simplest
C. Go-Back-N ARQ
D. Selective-Repeat
Repeat ARQ

3. The _______Protocol has both flow control and error

control
A. Stop-and-Wait
B. Go-Back-N ARQ
C. Selective-Repeat
Repeat ARQ
D. both (b) and (c)
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. In the _____ Protocol, the sender sends its frames one

after another with no regard to the receiver
A. Stop-and-Wait
B. Simplest
C. Go-Back-N ARQ
D. Selective-Repeat
Repeat ARQ

5. In the _____ Protocol, the sender sends one frame, stops

until it receives confirmation from the receiver, and then
sends the next frame.
A. Stop-and-Wait
B. Simplest
C. Go-Back-N ARQ
D. Selective-Repeat
Repeat ARQ

6. The _________Protocol, adds a simple error control

mechanism to the _______Protocol
A. Stop-and-Wait
Wait ARQ; Stop-and-Wait
Stop
B. Go-Back-N N ARQ; Stop-and-Wait
Stop
C. Selective Repeat ARQ; Go-Back-N
Go ARQ
D. none of the above

7. In the _________Protocol, if no acknowledgment for a

frame has arrived, we resend all outstanding frames
frames.
A. Stop-and-Wait
Wait ARQ
B. Go-Back-N ARQ
C. Selective-Repeat
Repeat ARQ
D. none of the above

8. In the _________ protocol we avoid unnecessary

transmission by sending only frames that are corrupted
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. Stop-and-Wait
Wait ARQ
B. Go-Back-N ARQ
C. Selective-Repeat
Repeat ARQ
D. none of the above

9. Both Go-Back-N and Selective-Repeat Protocols use a

_________
A. sliding frame
B. sliding window
C. sliding packet
D. none of the above

10. In Go-Back-N ARQ, if 5 is the number of bits for the

sequence number, then the maximum size of the send
window must be _____
A. 15
B. 16
C. 31
D. 1

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 3
Q-1 Correct Answer :Simplest
Q-2 Correct Answer :Stop-and-Wait
:Stop
Q-3 Correct Answer :both (b) and (c)
Q-4 Correct Answer :Simplest
Q-5 Correct Answer :Stop-and-Wait
:Stop
Q-6 Correct Answer :Stop-and-Wait
:Stop Wait ARQ; Stop
Stop-and-
Wait
Q-7 Correct Answer :Go-Back-N
:Go ARQ
Q-8 Correct Answer :Selective-Repeat
:Selective Repeat ARQ
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-9 Correct Answer :sliding window

Q-10 Correct Answer :31

Data Link Control MCQ Set-4

Set

1. In Go-Back-N ARQ, if 5 is the number of bits for the

sequence number, then the maximum size of the receive
window must be _____
A. 15
B. 16
C. 31
D. 1

2. In Selective Repeat ARQ, if 5 is the number of bits for the

sequence number, then the maximum size of the send
window must be _____
A. 15
B. 16
C. 31
D. 1

3. In Selective Repeat ARQ, if 5 is the number of bits for the

sequence number, then the maximum size of the receive
window must be _____
A. 15
B. 16
C. 31
D. 1
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) is a _______ protocol

for communication over point-to-point and multipoint links.
A. bit-oriented
B. byte-oriented
C. character-oriented
oriented
D. none of the above

5. The most common protocol for point-to-point access is the

Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), which is a _________protocol
A. bit-oriented
B. byte-oriented
C. character-oriented
oriented
D. none of the above

6. ______ control refers to a set of procedures used to

restrict the amount of data that the sender can send before
waiting for acknowledgment.
A. Flow
B. Error
C. Transmission
D. none of the above

7. _________control in the data link layer is based on

automatic repeat request, which is the retransmission of
data.
A. Flow
B. Error
C. Transmission
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. In Stop-and-Wait ARQ, we use sequence numbers to

number the frames. The sequence numbers are based on
__________arithmetic
A. modulo-2
B. modulo-4
C. modulo-m
D. none of the above

9. In Stop-and-Wait ARQ, the acknowledgment number

always announces in ______ arithmetic the sequence
number of the next frame expected
A. modulo-2
B. modulo-4
C. modulo-m
D. none of the above

10. In the Go-Back-N Protocol, if the size of the sequence

number field is 8, the sequence numbers are in ________
arithmetic
A. modulo-2
B. modulo- 8
C. modulo-256
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 4

Q-1 Correct Answer :1
Q-2 Correct Answer :16
Q-3 Correct Answer :16
Q-4 Correct Answer :bit-oriented
:bit
Q-5 Correct Answer :byte-oriented
:byte
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-6 Correct Answer :Flow

Q-7 Correct Answer :Error
Q-8 Correct Answer :modulo-2
:modulo
Q-9 Correct Answer :modulo-2
Q-10 Correct Answer :modulo-256
:modulo

Data Link Control MCQ Set-5

Set

1. Stop-and-Wait ARQ is a special case of Go-Back

Back-N ARQ in
which the size of the send window is 1.
A. 2
B. 1
C. 8
D. none of the above

2. In _________, the station configuration is unbalanced. We

have one primary station and multiple secondary stations.
A. ABM
B. NRM
C. ARM
D. NBM

3. In _________, the configuration is balanced. The link is

point-to-point, and each station can function as a primary
and a secondary
A. ABM
B. NRM
C. ARM
D. NBM
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. In PPP, the ________ is responsible for establishing,

maintaining, configuring, and terminating links
A. NCP
B. LCP
C. CHAP
D. PAP

5. In PPP, ________ is a simple authentication procedure with

a two-step process:
A. NCP
B. LCP
C. CHAP
D. PAP

6. In PPP, _______ is a three-way hand-shaking

authentication protocol in which the password is kept secret;
it is never sent online.
A. NCP
B. LCP
C. CHAP
D. PAP

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 5
Q-1 Correct Answer :1
Q-2 Correct Answer :NRM
Q-3 Correct Answer :ABM
Q-4 Correct Answer :LCP
Q-5 Correct Answer :PAP
Q-6 Correct Answer :CHAP
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-7
Q-8
Q-9
Q-10
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This Data Communication and Networking – Multiple Access

multiple choice (MCQ) based Questions and Answers PDF cover
the below lists of topic.

1. Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) Multiple Choice Question and

Answer.
2. Link Control Protocol (LCP) Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.
3. Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) Multiple Choice
Question and Answer.
4. Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP)
Multiple Choice Question and Answer.
5. Network Control Protocol (NCP) Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.
6. Internetwork Protocol Control Protocol (IPCP) Multiple
Choice Question and Answer.

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. In ________ each station sends a frame whenever it has a

frame to send.
A. pure ALOHA
B. slotted ALOHA
C. both (a) and (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

2. In pure ALOHA, the vulnerable time is ______ the frame

transmission time.
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. the same as
B. two times
C. three times
D. none of the above

3. The maximum throughput for pure ALOHA is ________ per

cent.
A. 12.2
B. 18.4
C. 36.8
D. none of the above

4. In __________, each station is forced to send only at the

beginning of the time slot
A. pure ALOHA
B. slotted ALOHA
C. both (a) and (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

5. In slotted ALOHA, the vulnerable time is ______ the frame

transmission time.
A. the same as
B. two times
C. three times
D. none of the above

6. The maximum throughput for pure ALOHA is ________ per

cent.
A. 12.2
B. 18.4
C. 36.8
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

7. The vulnerable time for CSMA is the ________propagation

time.
A. the same as
B. two times
C. three times
D. none of the above

8. In the _________ method, after the station finds the line

idle, it sends its frame immediately. If the line is not idle, it
continuously senses the line until it finds it idle.
A. nonpersistent
B. 1-persistent
C. p-persistent
D. none of the above

9. In the ________method, a station that has a frame to send

senses the line. If the line is idle, it sends immediately. If the
line is not idle, it waits a random amount of time and then
senses the line again.
A. nonpersistent
B. 1-persistent
C. p-persistent
D. none of the above

10. In the _______method, after the station finds the line idle
it sends or refrain from sending based on the outcome of a
random number generator. If the line is busy, it tries again
A. nonpersistent
B. 1-persistent
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. p-persistent
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :pure ALOHA
Q-2 Correct Answer :two times
Q-3 Correct Answer :18.4
Q-4 Correct Answer :slotted ALOHA
Q-5 Correct Answer :the same as
Q-6 Correct Answer :36.8
Q-7 Correct Answer :the same as
Q-8 Correct Answer :1-persistent
Q-9 Correct Answer :nonpersistent
Q-10 Correct Answer :p-persistent

Multiple Access MCQ Set-2

1. We have categorized access methods into _______

groups.
A. two
B. three
C. four
D. five

2. In ___________ methods, no station is superior to another

station and none is assigned the control over another
A. random access
B. controlled access
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. channelization
D. none of the above

3. In ______, the chance of collision can be reduced if a

station senses the medium before trying to use it.
A. MA
B. CSMA
C. FDMA
D. CDMA

4. _______ requires that each station first listen to the

medium before sending.
A. MA
B. CSMA
C. FDMA
D. CDMA

5. __________ augments the CSMA algorithm to detect

collision
A. CSMA/CA
B. CSMA/CD
C. either (a) or (b)
D. both (a) and (b)

6. in ________, a station monitors the medium after it sends a

frame to see if the transmission was successful. If so, the
station is finished. If, however, there is a collision, the frame
is sent again
A. CSMA/CA
B. CSMA/CD
C. either (a) or (b)
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. both (a) and (b)

7. To avoid collisions on wireless networks, ________was

invented.
A. CSMA/CA
B. CSMA/CD
C. either (a) or (b)
D. both (a) and (b)

8. In _______, collisions are avoided through the use of three

strategies: the interframe space, the contention window, and
acknowledgments.
A. CSMA/CA
B. CSMA/CD
C. either (a) or (b)
D. both (a) and (b)

9. In _______ methods, the stations consult one another to

find which station has the right to send
A. random access
B. controlled access
C. channelization
D. none of the above

10. In _______ methods, a station cannot send unless it has

been authorized by other stations.
A. random access
B. controlled access
C. channelization
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :three
Q-2 Correct Answer :random access
Q-3 Correct Answer :CSMA
Q-4 Correct Answer :CSMA
Q-5 Correct Answer :CSMA/CD
Q-6 Correct Answer :CSMA/CD
Q-7 Correct Answer :CSMA/CA
Q-8 Correct Answer :CSMA/CA
Q-9 Correct Answer :controlled access
Q-10 Correct Answer :controlled access

Multiple Access MCQ Set-3

1. We discussed ______ popular controlled-access methods

A. two
B. three
C. four
D. none of the above

2. In the ________ method, a station needs to make a

reservation before sending data. Time is divided into
intervals.
A. reservation
B. polling
C. token passing
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

3. In the _____ method, time is divided into intervals. In each

interval, a reservation frame precedes the data frames sent in
that interval.
A. reservation
B. polling
C. token passing
D. none of the above

4. In the ______ method, all data exchanges must be made

through the primary device even when the ultimate
destination is a secondary device.
A. reservation
B. polling
C. token passing
D. none of the above

5. In the _______ method, the primary device controls the

link; the secondary devices follow its instructions.
A. reservation
B. polling
C. token passing
D. none of the above

6. In the _______ method, the stations in a network are

organized in a logical ring.
A. reservation
B. polling
C. token passing
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. In the _______ method, each station has a predecessor

and a successor
A. reservation
B. polling
C. token passing
D. none of the above

8. In the ___ method, a special packet called a

circulates through the ring.
A. reservation: control frame
B. polling: poll request
C. token passing: token
D. none of the above

9. _______ is a multiple-access method in which the available

bandwidth of a link is shared in time, frequency, or through
code, between different stations
A. Random access
B. Controlled access
C. Channelization
D. none of the above

10. We discussed ________ channelization protocols

A. two
B. three
C. four
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer :three
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-2 Correct Answer :reservation

Q-3 Correct Answer :reservation
Q-4 Correct Answer :polling
Q-5 Correct Answer :polling
Q-6 Correct Answer :token passing
Q-7 Correct Answer :token passing
Q-8 Correct Answer :token passing: token
Q-9 Correct Answer :Channelization
Q-10 Correct Answer :three

Multiple Access MCQ Set-4

1. In ________, the available bandwidth is divided into

frequency bands.
A. FDMA
B. TDMA
C. CDMA
D. none of the above

2. In ______, each station is allocated a band to send its data.

In other words, each band is reserved for a specific station,
and it belongs to the station all the time.
A. FDMA
B. TDMA
C. CDMA
D. none of the above

3. In _______, the stations share the bandwidth of the

channel in time.
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. FDMA
B. TDMA
C. CDMA
D. none of the above

4. In _____, each station is allocated a time slot during which

it can send data. Each station transmits its data in its
assigned time slot.
A. FDMA
B. TDMA
C. CDMA
D. none of the above

5. In _____, each station transmits its data in its assigned

time slot
A. FDMA
B. TDMA
C. CDMA
D. none of the above

6. In ______, the stations use different codes to achieve

multiple access.
A. FDMA
B. TDMA
C. CDMA
D. none of the above

7. _______ is based on coding theory and uses sequences of

numbers called chips
A. FDMA
B. TDMA
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. CDMA
D. none of the above

8. In _______, the sequences are generated using orthogonal

codes such the Walsh tables
A. FDMA
B. TDMA
C. CDMA
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 4

Q-1 Correct Answer :FDMA
Q-2 Correct Answer :FDMA
Q-3 Correct Answer :TDMA
Q-4 Correct Answer :TDMA
Q-5 Correct Answer :TDMA
Q-6 Correct Answer :CDMA
Q-7 Correct Answer :CDMA
Q-8 Correct Answer :CDMA
Q-9
Q-10
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – Wired LANs:
Ethernet multiple choice (MCQ) based Questions and Answers
PDF covers the below lists of topics.
topic

1. Medium access methods Multiple Choice Question and

Answer.
2. Carrier sense multiple-access
multiple (CSMA) method Mu Multiple
Choice Question and Answer.
Answer
3. Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection
(CSMA/CD) Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
4. Carrier sense multiple access with collision avoidance
(CSMA/CA) Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
5. Reservation, polling,
ing, and token passing controlled
controlled-access
methods Multiple Choice Question and Answer.
Answer
6. FDMA, TDMA, and CDMA channelization methods Multiple
Choice Question and Answer.

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. What is the hexadecimal equivalent of the Ethernet

address 01011010 00010001 01010101 00011000 10101010
00001111?
A. 5A:88:AA:18:55:F0
B. 5A:81:BA:81:AA:0F
C. 5A:11:55:18:AA:0F
D. 5A:18:5A:18:55:0F

2. If an Ethernet destination address is 07:01:02:03:04:05,

then this is a ______ address.
A. unicast
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. any of the above

3. If an Ethernet destination address is 08:07:06:05:44:33,

then this is a ______ address.
A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. any of the above

4. Which of the following could not be an Ethernet unicast

destination?
A. 43:7B:6C:DE:10:00
B. 44:AA:C1:23:45:32
C. 46:56:21:1A:DE:F4
D. 48:32:21:21:4D:34

5. Which of the following could not be an Ethernet multicast

destination?
A. B7:7B:6C:DE:10:00
B. 7B:AA:C1:23:45:32
C. 7C:56:21:1A:DE:F4
D. 83:32:21:21:4D:34

6. _______ is the most widely used local area network

protocol.
A. Token Ring
B. Token Bus
C. Ethernet
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. The IEEE 802.3 Standard defines _________ CSMA/CD as

the access method for first-generation 10-Mbps Ethernet.
A. 1-persistent
B. p-persistent
C. non-persistent
D. none of the above

8. The _______ layer of Ethernet consists of the LLC sublayer

and the MAC sublayer.
A. data link
B. physical
C. network
D. none of the above

9. The _____ sublayer is responsible for the operation of the

CSMA/CD access method and framing.
A. LLC
B. MII
C. MAC
D. none of the above

10. Each station on an Ethernet network has a unique

_______ address imprinted on its network interface card
(NIC).
A. 5-byte
B. 32-bit
C. 48-bit
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 1
Q-1 Correct Answer :5A:11:55:18:AA:0F
Q-2 Correct Answer :multicast
Q-3 Correct Answer :unicast
Q-4 Correct Answer :43:7B:6C:DE:10:00
Q-5 Correct Answer :7C:56:21:1A:DE:F4
Q-6 Correct Answer :Ethernet
Q-7 Correct Answer :1-persistent
:1
Q-8 Correct Answer :data link
Q-9 Correct Answer :MAC
Q-10 Correct Answer :48-bit
:48

Wired LANs: Ethernet MCQ Set-2

Set

1. The minimum frame length for 10-Mbps Ethernet is

_______bytes.
A. 32
B. 80
C. 128
D. none of the above

2. The maximum frame length for 10-Mbps Ethernet is

________ bytes.
A. 1518
B. 1500
C. 1200
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

3. _________ uses thick coaxial cable

A. 10Base5
B. 10Base2
C. 10Base-T
D. 10Base-F

4. __________ uses thin coaxial cable

A. 10Base5
B. 10Base2
C. 10Base-T
D. 10Base-F

5. _________ uses four twisted-pair cables that connect each

station to a common hub.
A. 10Base5
B. 10Base2
C. 10Base-T
D. 10Base-F

6. _______ uses fiber-optic

fiber cable
A. 10Base5
B. 10Base2
C. 10Base-T
D. 10Base-F

7. Fast Ethernet has a data rate of ________Mbps.

A. 10
B. 100
C. 1000
D. 10000
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. In _________, autonegotiation allows two devices to

negotiate the mode or data rate of operation.
A. Standard
B. Fast Ethernet
C. Gigabit Ethernet
D. Ten-Gigabit
Gigabit Ethernet

9. _________ uses two pairs of twisted-pair cable.

A. 100Base-TX
B. 100Base-FX
C. 100Base-T4
D. none of the above

10. ________ uses two fiber-optic cables.

A. 100Base-TX
B. 100Base-FX
C. 100Base-T4
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-2 Correct Answer :1518
Q-3 Correct Answer :10Base5
Q-4 Correct Answer :10Base2
Q-5 Correct Answer :10Base-T
:10Base
Q-6 Correct Answer :10Base-F
:10Base
Q-7 Correct Answer :100
Q-8 Correct Answer :Fast Ethernet
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-9 Correct Answer :100Base-TX

:100Base
Q-10 Correct Answer :100Base-FX
:100Base

Wired LANs: Ethernet MCQ Set-3

Set

1. ________ uses four pairs of voice-grade, or higher,

twisted-pair cable.
A. 100Base-TX
B. 100Base-FX
C. 100Base-T4
D. none of the above

2. Gigabit Ethernet has a data rate of ________Mbps

A. 10
B. 100
C. 1000
D. 10000

3. Gigabit Ethernet access methods include _______ mode.

A. half-duplex
B. full-duplex
C. both (a) and (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

4. _________ uses two optical fibers and a short-wave

wave laser
source,
A. 1000Base-SX
B. 1000Base-LX
C. 1000Base-T
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

5. _________uses two optical fibers and a long-wave

wave laser
source
A. 1000Base-SX
B. 1000Base-LX
C. 1000Base-T
D. none of the above

6. __________ uses four twisted pairs.

A. 1000Base-SX
B. 1000Base-LX
C. 1000Base-T
D. none of the above

7. _______ uses short-wave

short 850-nm multimode fiber
A. 10GBase-S
B. 10GBase-L
C. 10GBase-E
D. none of the above

8. ________uses long-wave
long 1310-nm single mode fiber
A. 10GBase-S
B. 10GBase-L
C. 10GBase-E
D. none of the above

9. ________ uses 1550-mm

1550 single mode fiber
A. 10GBase-S
B. 10GBase-L
C. 10GBase-E
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

10. In Ethernet addressing, if the least significant bit of the

first byte is 0, the address is _________
A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 3
Q-1 Correct Answer :100Base-T4
Q-2 Correct Answer :1000
Q-3 Correct Answer :both (a) and (b)
Q-4 Correct Answer :1000Base-SX
:1000Base
Q-5 Correct Answer :1000Base-LX
:1000Base
Q-6 Correct Answer :1000Base-T
:1000Base
Q-7 Correct Answer :10GBase-S
:10GBase
Q-8 Correct Answer :10GBase-L
:10GBase
Q-9 Correct Answer :10GBase-E
Q-10 Correct Answer :unicast

Wired LANs: Ethernet MCQ Set-4

Set

1. In Ethernet addressing, if the least significant bit of the

first byte is 1, the address is _________
A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

2. In Ethernet addressing, if all the bits are 1s, the address is

_________
A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. none of the above

3. _____defines a protocol data unit (PDU) that is somewhat

similar to that of HDLC
A. MAC
B. LLC
C. LLU
D. none of the above

4. The purpose of the _______ is to provide flow and error

control for the upper-layer
upper protocols that actually demand
these services
A. MAC
B. LLC
C. LLU
D. none of the above

5. In the Ethernet, the _______field is actually added at the

physical layer and is not (formally) part of the frame.
A. CRC
B. preamble
C. address
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

6. In the Ethernet frame, the _______ field contains error

detection information
A. CRC
B. preamble
C. address
D. none of the above

7. Standard Ethernet (10-Mbps) uses _______ encoding

A. NRZ
B. AMI
C. Manchester
D. differential Manchester

8. 100Base-TX uses _ block coding and

line coding.
A. 4B/5B; NRZ
B. 8B/10B; NRZ
C. 4B/5B; MLT-3
D. 8B/10B; NRZ

9. 100Base-FX uses _ block coding and

line coding
A. 4B/5B; NRZ-I
B. 8B/10B; NRZ
C. 4B/5B; MLT-3
D. 8B/10B; NRZ

10. 100Base-T4 uses ________ line coding

A. NRZ
B. 8B6T
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. MLT-3
D. Manchester

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 4
Q-1 Correct Answer :multicast
Q-2 Correct Answer :broadcast
Q-3 Correct Answer :LLC
Q-4 Correct Answer :LLC
Q-5 Correct Answer :preamble
Q-6 Correct Answer :CRC
Q-7 Correct Answer :Manchester
Q-8 Correct Answer :4B/5B; MLT-3
MLT
Q-9 Correct Answer :4B/5B; NRZ-I
NRZ
Q-10 Correct Answer :8B6T
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

In this section of Data Communication and Networking –

Wireless LANs multiple choice (MCQ) based ased Questions and
Answers PDF covers the below lists of topics.
topic

1. Ethernet Multiple Choice Question and Answer.

Answer
2. IEEE 802.3 standard Multiple Choice Question and Answer.
3. LLC sublayer and the MAC sublayer Multiple Choice
Question and Answer.
Answer
4. 10Base5 (thick Ethernet), 10Base2 (thin Ethernet), 10Base
10Base-
T (twisted-pair
pair Ethernet), and 10Base-FL
10Base FL (fiber link Ethernet)
Multiple Choice Question and Answer.
Answer
5. Fast Ethernet Multiple
Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
6. Common Fast Ethernet implementations , 100Base100Base-TX (two
pairs of twisted-pair
pair cable), 100Base-FX
100Base FX (two fiber
fiber-optic
cables), and 100Base-T4
100Base (four pairs of voice-grade,
grade, or
higher, twisted-pair
pair cable) Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.
7. Gigabit Ethernet Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
8. common Gigabit Ethernet implementations , 1000Base
1000Base-SX
(two optical fibers and a shortwave laser source), 100Base
100Base-
LX (two optical fibers and a long-wave
long wave laser source), and
100Base-T T (four twisted
twiste pairs) Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

1. IEEE has defined the specifications for a wireless LAN,

called _______, which covers the physical and data link
layers.
A. IEEE 802.3
B. IEEE 802.5
C. IEEE 802.11
D. IEEE 802.2

2. In IEEE 802.11, a ___ is made of stationary or mobile

wireless stations and an optional central base station, known
as the access point (AP).
A. ESS
B. BSS
C. CSS
D. none of the above

3. In IEEE 802.11, a BSS without an AP is called an

_________.
A. an ad hoc architecture
B. an infrastructure network
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

4. In IEEE 802.11, a BSS with an AP is sometimes referred to

as ____________
A. an ad hoc architecture
B. an infrastructure network
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

5. In IEEE 802.11, communication between two stations in

two different BSSs usually occurs via two ________.
A. BSSs
B. ESSs
C. APs
D. none of the above

6. In IEEE 802.11, a station with ________ mobility is either

stationary (not moving) or moving only inside a BSS.
A. no-transition
B. BSS-transition
C. ESS-transition
D. none of the above

7. In IEEE 802.11, a station with ________mobility can move

from one BSS to another, but the movement is confined
inside one ESS.
A. no-transition
B. BSS-transition
C. ESS-transition
D. none of the above

8. In IEEE 802.11, a station with ________ mobility can move

from one ESS to another.
A. no-transition
B. BSS-transition
C. ESS-transition
D. none of the above

9. In IEEE 802.11, _______ is an optional access method that

can be implemented in an infrastructure network (not in an
ad hoc network)
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. DCF
B. PCF
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

10. In IEEE 802.11, when a frame is going from one station in

a BSS to another without passing through the distribution
system, the address flag is _____
A. 00
B. 01
C. 10
D. 11

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 1
Q-1 Correct Answer :IEEE 802.11
Q-2 Correct Answer :BSS
Q-3 Correct Answer :an ad hoc architecture
Q-4 Correct Answer :an infrastructure network
Q-5 Correct Answer :APs
Q-6 Correct Answer :no-transition
:no
Q-7 Correct Answer :BSS-transition
Q-8 Correct Answer :ESS-transition
:ESS
Q-9 Correct Answer :PCF
Q-10 Correct Answer :00

Wireless LANs MCQ Set-2

Set
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

1. In IEEE 802.11, when a frame is coming from an AP and

going to a station, the address flag is _______.
A. 00
B. 01
C. 10
D. 11

2. In IEEE 802.11, when a frame is going from a station to an

AP, the address flag is _____
A. 00
B. 01
C. 10
D. 11

3. In IEEE 802.11, when a frame is going from one AP to

another AP in a wireless distribution system, the address
flag is _____
A. 00
B. 01
C. 10
D. 11

4. The IEEE 802.11 standard for wireless LANs defines two

services: ______ and _______
A. BSS; ASS
B. ESS; SSS
C. BSS; ESS
D. BSS; DCF

5. In IEEE 802.11, the access method used in the DCF

sublayer is _________
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. ALOHA
B. CSMA/CA
C. CSMA/CD
D. none of the above

6. In IEEE 802.11, the access method used in the PCF

sublayer is ______
A. contention
B. controlled
C. polling
D. none of the above

7. In IEEE 802.11, the ______ is a timer used for collision

avoidance
A. NAV
B. BSS
C. ESS
D. none of the above

8. In IEEE 802.11, the MAC layer frame has ______ fields

A. four
B. five
C. six
D. none of the above

9. In IEEE 802.11, the addressing mechanism can include up

to ______addresses
A. four
B. five
C. six
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

10. The original IEEE 802.11, uses _________

A. FHSS
B. DSSS
C. OFDM
D. either (a) or (b)

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :01
Q-2 Correct Answer :10
Q-3 Correct Answer :11
Q-4 Correct Answer :BSS; ESS
Q-5 Correct Answer :CSMA/CA
Q-6 Correct Answer :polling
Q-7 Correct Answer :NAV
Q-8 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-9 Correct Answer :four
Q-10 Correct Answer :either (a) or (b)

Wireless LANs MCQ Set-3

Set

1. The IEEE 802.11a, uses _________

A. FHSS
B. DSSS
C. OFDM
D. either (a) or (b)
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

2. The IEEE 802.11b, uses _________

A. FHSS
B. DSSS
C. OFDM
D. either (a) or (b)

3. The IEEE 802.11g, uses _________

A. FHSS
B. DSSS
C. OFDM
D. either (a) or (b)

4. The original IEEE 802.11, has a data rate of _____Mbps.

A. 1
B. 6
C. 11
D. 22

5. IEEE 802.11a, has a data rate of _____Mbps

A. 1
B. 2
C. 6
D. none of the above

6. IEEE 802.11b, has a data rate of _____Mbps

A. 1
B. 2
C. 5.5
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. IEEE 802.11g, has a data rate of _____Mbps

A. 1
B. 2
C. 11
D. 22

8. The IEEE 802.11 wireless LANs use ________ types of

frames
A. four
B. five
C. six
D. none of the above

9. Bluetooth is a _______ technology that connects devices

(called gadgets) in a small area
A. wired LAN
B. wireless LAN
C. VLAN
D. none of the above

10. A Bluetooth network is called a ________.

A. piconet
B. scatternet
C. bluenet
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 3
Q-1 Correct Answer :OFDM
Q-2 Correct Answer :DSSS
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-3 Correct Answer :OFDM

Q-4 Correct Answer :1
Q-5 Correct Answer :6
Q-6 Correct Answer :5.5
Q-7 Correct Answer :22
Q-8 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-9 Correct Answer :wireless LAN
Q-10 Correct Answer :piconet

Wireless LANs MCQ Set-4

Set

1. In Bluetooth, multiple ________ form a network called a

_________
A. scatternet; piconets
B. piconets: scatternet
C. piconets: bluenet
D. bluenet; scatternet

2. A Bluetooth network consists of _____ primary device(s)

and up to ____ secondary devices.
A. one; five
B. five; three
C. two; six
D. one; seven

3. The RTS and CTS frames in CSMA/CA ____ solve the

hidden station problem. The RTS and CTS frames in
CSMA/CA ____ solve the exposed station problem.
A. can; cannot
B. cannot; can
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. can; can
D. cannot; cannot

4. In Bluetooth, the current data rate is ____Mbps

A. 2
B. 5
C. 11
D. none of the above
e

5. In Bluetooth, the _______ layer is roughly equivalent to the

physical layer of the Internet model.
A. radio
B. baseband
C. L2CAP
D. none of the above

6. In Bluetooth, the _____layer is roughly equivalent to the

MAC sublayer in LANs.
A. radio
B. baseband
C. L2CAP
D. none of the above

7. In Bluetooth, the L2CAP sublayer, is roughly equivalent to

the LLC sublayer in LANs
A. radio
B. baseband
C. L2CAP
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. The access method in Bluetooth is ________

A. FDMA
B. TDD-TDMA
C. CDMA
D. none of the above

9. In Bluetooth, the _____ link is used when avoiding latency

(delay in data delivery) is more important than integrity
(error-free delivery).
A. SCO
B. ACL
C. ACO
D. SCL

10. In Bluetooth, the _____ link is used when data integrity is

more important than avoiding latency.
A. SCO
B. ACL
C. ACO
D. SCL

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 4
Q-1 Correct Answer :piconets: scatternet
Q-2 Correct Answer :one; seven
Q-3 Correct Answer :can; cannot
Q-4 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-5 Correct Answer :radio
Q-6 Correct Answer :baseband
Q-7 Correct Answer :L2CAP
Q-8 Correct Answer :TDD-TDMA
:TDD
Q-9 Correct Answer :SCO
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-10 Correct Answer :ACL

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – Connecting
ecting LANs,
Backbone Networks, and Virtual LANs multiple choice
Questions and Answers (MCQ) PDF covers the below lists of
topics.

1. IEEE 802.11 standard for wireless LANs Multiple Choice

Question and Answer.
Answer
2. Physical
sical layer methods Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.
3. Frequency-hopping
hopping spread spectrum (FHSS) Multiple
Choice Question and Answer.
Answer
4. Direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) Multiple Choice
Question and Answer.
Answer
5. Orthogonal frequency-division
frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) Multiple
Choice Question and Answer.
Answer
6. High-rate
rate direct sequence spread spectrum (HR-
(HR
DSSS) Multiple Choice Question and Answer
7. Bluetooth network Multiple Choice Question and Answer

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. A repeater is a connecting device that operates in the

_______ layer of the Internet model.
A. physical
B. data link
C. network
D. all of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

2. A _______ regenerates a signal, connects segments of a

LAN, and has no filtering capability.
A. repeater
B. bridge
C. router
D. none of the above

3. A _______ is a connecting device that operates in the

physical and data link layers of the Internet model.
A. repeater
B. bridge
C. router
D. none of the above

4. A ________ bridge can forward and filter frames and

automatically build its forwarding table.
A. simple
B. dual
C. transparent
D. none of the above

5. A bridge can use the _________ algorithm to create a

loopless topology.
A. binary tree
B. spanning tree
C. multiway tree
D. none of the above

6. A _______ LAN allows several LANs to be connected.

A. backbone
B. wireless
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. wired
D. none of the above

7. A backbone is usually a ______.

A. bus
B. star
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

8. A virtual local area network (VLAN) is configured by

_________
A. software
B. physical wiring
C. hardware
D. none of the above

9. Membership in a VLAN can be based on _________.

A. port numbers
B. MAC addresses
C. IP addresses
D. all of the above

10. VLANs can_________.

A. reduce network traffic
B. provide an extra measure of security
C. either (a) or (b)
D. both (a) and (b)

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :physical
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-2 Correct Answer :repeater

Q-3 Correct Answer :bridge
Q-4 Correct Answer :transparent
Q-5 Correct Answer :spanning tree
Q-6 Correct Answer :backbone
Q-7 Correct Answer :either (a) or (b)
Q-8 Correct Answer :software
Q-9 Correct Answer :all of the above
Q-10 Correct Answer :both (a) and (b)

Connecting LANs, Backbone Networks, and Virtual LANs MCQ

Set-2

1. _________ is just a connector

A. An active hub
B. A passive hub
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

2. In a star-topology Ethernet LAN, _______ is just a point

where the signals coming from different stations collide; it is
the collision point.
A. An active hub
B. A passive hub
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

3. ________ is part of the media; its location in the Internet

model is below the physical layer.
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. An active hub
B. A passive hub
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

4. A _______ is a device that operates only in the physical

layer.
A. passive hub
B. repeater
C. bridge
D. router

5. A ________receives a signal and, before it becomes too

weak or corrupted, regenerates the original bit pattern. It
then sends the refreshed signal.
A. passive hub
B. repeater
C. bridge
D. router

6. A __________ forwards every frame; it has no filtering

capability.
A. passive hub
B. repeater
C. bridge
D. router

7. ________ is actually a multiport repeater. It is normally

used to create connections between stations in a physical
star topology
A. An active hub
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. A passive hub
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

8. A ________ operates in both the physical and the data link

layer.
A. passive hub
B. repeater
C. bridge
D. router

9. A _______ can check the MAC addresses contained in the

frame.
A. passive hub
B. repeater
C. bridge
D. router

10. A ______ has a table used in filtering decisions.

A. passive hub
B. repeater
C. bridge
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 2
Q-1 Correct Answer :A passive hub
Q-2 Correct Answer :A passive hub
Q-3 Correct Answer :A passive hub
Q-4 Correct Answer :repeater
Q-5 Correct Answer :repeater
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-6 Correct Answer :repeater

Q-7 Correct Answer :An active hub
Q-8 Correct Answer :bridge
Q-9 Correct Answer :bridge
Q-10 Correct Answer :bridge

Connecting LANs, Backbone Networks, and Virtual LANs MCQ

Set-3

1. A ________ is a device in which the stations are

completely unaware of its existence.
A. passive hub
B. repeater
C. simple bridge
D. transparent bridge

2. IEEE 802.1d specification, defines _________ criteria for a

transparent bridges.
A. two
B. three
C. four
D. none of the above

3. A spanning tree is a graph in which there is no _____.

A. node
B. branch
C. loop
D. arc
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. In a bridged LAN, the _______ algorithm creates a

topology in which each LAN can be reached from any other
LAN through one path only.
A. spanning tree
B. binary tree
C. unary tree
D. none of the above

5. A three-layer switch is a kind of ________

A. repeater
B. bridge
C. router
D. none of the above

6. A two-layer switch is a ______.

A. repeater
B. bridge
C. router
D. none of the above

7. Some new two-layer

layer switches, called _______ switches,
have been designed to forward the frame as soon as they
check the MAC addresses in the header of the frame
A. cut-through
B. go-through
C. come-through
D. none of the above

8. A _______ is a three-layer
three device that handles packets
based on their logical addresses.
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. repeater
B. bridge
C. router
D. none of the above

9. A ______ normally connects LANs and WANs in the

Internet and has a table that is used for making decisions
about the route.
A. repeater
B. bridge
C. router
D. none of the above

10. A ______ switch is a faster and more sophisticated

router.
A. two-layer
B. three-layer
C. four-layer
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 3
Q-1 Correct Answer :transparent bridge
Q-2 Correct Answer :three
Q-3 Correct Answer :loop
Q-4 Correct Answer :spanning tree
Q-5 Correct Answer :router
Q-6 Correct Answer :bridge
Q-7 Correct Answer :cut-through
Q-8 Correct Answer :router
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-9 Correct Answer :router

Q-10 Correct Answer :three-layer
:three

Connecting LANs, Backbone Networks, and Virtual LANs MCQ

Set-4

1. A ________ is normally a computer that operates in all five

layers of the Internet model or seven layers of OSI model.
A. repeater
B. bridge
C. router
D. gateway

2. A _____ can be used as a connecting device between two

internetworks that use different models.
A. repeater
B. bridge
C. router
D. gateway

3. In a _____ backbone, the backbone is just one switch

A. bus
B. ring
C. star
D. none of the above

4. A ________ link acts as a LAN in a remote backbone

connected by remote bridges
A. point-to-point
B. multipoint
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. multidrop
D. none of the above

5. VLANs create _________ domains

A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. none of the above

6. In a(n) _______ configuration, the administrator types the

port numbers, the IP addresses, or other characteristics,
using the VLAN software.
A. manual
B. automatic
C. semiautomatic
D. none of the above

7. In a(n) _____ configuration, the stations are automatically

connected or disconnected from a VLAN using criteria
defined by the administrator
A. manual
B. automatic
C. semiautomatic
D. none of the above

8. In a(n) ______ configuration, the initializing is done

manually, with migrations done automatically.
A. manual
B. automatic
C. semiautomatic
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 4
Q-1 Correct Answer :gateway
Q-2 Correct Answer :gateway
Q-3 Correct Answer :star
Q-4 Correct Answer :point-to-point
:point
Q-5 Correct Answer :broadcast
Q-6 Correct Answer :manual
Q-7 Correct Answer :automatic
Q-8 Correct Answer :semiautomatic
Q-9
Q-10
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This Data Communication and Networking – Wireless WANs –

Cellular Telephone and Satellite Networks multiple choice
Questions and Answers (MCQ) PDF covers the below lists of
topics.

1. Repeater Multiple Choice Question and Answer.

Answer
2. Bridge Multiple Choice Question and Answer.
3. Backbone LAN Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
4. Virtual local area network (VLAN) Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. AMPS operates in the ISM _____ band

A. 800-MHz
B. 900-MHz
C. 1800-MHz
D. none of the above

2. _______ is a first-generation
generation cellular phone system
A. AMPS
B. D-AMPS
C. GSM
D. none of the above

3. __________ is a second-generation
second cellular phone system.
A. AMPS
B. D-AMPS
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. GSM
D. none of the above

4. ____________ is a digital version of AMPS

A. GSM
B. D-AMPS
C. IS-95
D. none of the above

5. __________ is a second-generation
second cellular phone system
used in Europe.
A. GSM
B. D-AMPS
C. IS-95
D. none of the above

6. ________ is a second-generation
second cellular phone system
based on CDMA and DSSS.
A. GSM
B. D-AMPS
C. IS-95
D. none of the above

7. The __________ cellular phone system will provide

universal personal communication
A. first-generation
B. second-generation
generation
C. third-generation
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. In a ______ handoff, a mobile station only communicates

with one base station
A. hard
B. soft
C. medium
D. none of the above

9. In a ______ handoff, a mobile station can communicate

with two base stations at the same time
A. hard
B. soft
C. medium
D. none of the above

10. ______ is an analog cellular phone system using FDMA.

A. AMPS
B. D-AMPS
C. GSM
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :800-MHz
:800
Q-2 Correct Answer :AMPS
Q-3 Correct Answer :D-AMPS
:D
Q-4 Correct Answer :D-AMPS
:D
Q-5 Correct Answer :GSM
Q-6 Correct Answer :IS-95
:IS
Q-7 Correct Answer :third-generation
:third
Q-8 Correct Answer :hard
Q-9 Correct Answer :soft
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-10 Correct Answer :AMPS

Wireless WANs – Cellular Telephone and Satellite Networks MCQ

Set-2

1. In AMPS, each band is divided into ______ channels

A. 800
B. 900
C. 1000
D. none of the above

2. AMPS has a frequency reuse factor of _______

A. 1
B. 3
C. 5
D. 7

3. AMPS uses ______ to divide each 25-MHz band into

channels
A. FDMA
B. TDMA
C. CDMA
D. none of the above

4. D-AMPS uses ______ to divide each 25-MHz band into

channels
A. FDMA
B. TDMA
C. CDMA
D. both (a) and (b)
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

5. GSM allows a reuse factor of _______

A. 1
B. 3
C. 5
D. 7

6. GSM is a digital cellular phone system using ________

A. FDMA
B. TDMA
C. CDMA
D. both (a) and (b)

7. IS-95 is based on ____________

A. FDMA
B. CDMA
C. DSSS
D. all of the above

8. IS-95 uses the ISM _______band

A. 800-MHz
B. 900-MHz
C. 1900-MHz
D. either (a) or (c)

9. IS-95 uses the _______ satellite system for

synchronization
A. GPS
B. Teledesic
C. Iridium
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

10. In an IS-95 system, the frequency-reuse factor is normally

_____
A. 1
B. 3
C. 5
D. 7

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 2
Q-1 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-2 Correct Answer :7
Q-3 Correct Answer :FDMA
Q-4 Correct Answer :both (a) and (b)
Q-5 Correct Answer :3
Q-6 Correct Answer :both (a) and (b)
Q-7 Correct Answer :all of the above
Q-8 Correct Answer :either (a) or (c)
Q-9 Correct Answer :GPS
Q-10 Correct Answer :1

Wireless WANs – Cellular Telephone and Satellite Networks MCQ

Set-3

1. In the third generation of cellular phones, _______ uses W-

CDMA.
A. IMT-DS
B. IMT-MC
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. IMT-TC
D. IMT-SC

2. In the third generation of cellular phones, ________ uses

CDMA2000
A. IMT-DS
B. IMT-MC
C. IMT-TC
D. IMT-SC

3. In the third generation of cellular phones, ______ uses a

combination of W-CDMA
CDMA and TDMA.
A. IMT-DS
B. IMT-MC
C. IMT-TC
D. IMT-SC

4. In the third generation of cellular phones, _______ uses

TDMA.
A. IMT-DS
B. IMT-MC
C. IMT-TC
D. IMT-SC

5. The period of a satellite, the time required for a satellite to

make a complete trip around the Earth, is determined by
_________ law
A. Kepler's
B. Newton's
C. Ohm's
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

6. The signal from a satellite is normally aimed at a specific

area called the _________
A. path
B. effect
C. footprint
D. none of the above

7. There is (are) _____ orbit(s) for a GEO satellite

A. one
B. two
C. many
D. none of the above

8. MEO satellites are located at altitudes between km.

A. 3000 and 5000
B. 5000 and 10,000
C. 5000 and 15,000
D. none of the above

9. LEO satellites are normally below an altitude of ________

km.
A. 1000
B. 2000
C. 3000
D. none of the above

10. ______ is based on a principle called trilateration

A. GPS
B. Teledesic
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. Iridium
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 3
Q-1 Correct Answer :IMT-DS
:IMT
Q-2 Correct Answer :IMT-MC
:IMT
Q-3 Correct Answer :IMT-TC
:IMT
Q-4 Correct Answer :IMT-SC
:IMT
Q-5 Correct Answer :Kepler's
Q-6 Correct Answer :footprint
Q-7 Correct Answer :one
Q-8 Correct Answer :5000 and 15,000
Q-9 Correct Answer :2000
Q-10 Correct Answer :GPS

Wireless WANs – Cellular Telephone and Satellite Networks MCQ

Set-4

1. Low-Earth-orbit (LEO) satellites have _____ orbits.

A. equatorial
B. polar
C. inclined
D. none of the above

2. A GEO is at the ________ orbit and revolves in phase with

Earth.
A. equatorial
B. polar
C. inclined
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

3. GPS satellites are ________ satellites

A. GEO
B. MEO
C. LEO
D. none of the above

4. _______ satellites provide time and location information

for vehicles and ships.
A. GPS
B. Iridium
C. Teledesic
D. none of the above

5. Iridium satellites are ________satellites

A. GEO
B. MEO
C. LEO
D. none of the above

6. ________ satellites can provide direct universal voice and

data communications for handheld terminals
A. GPS
B. Iridium
C. Teledesic
D. none of the above

7. Teledesic satellites are _________satellites

A. GEO
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. MEO
C. LEO
D. none of the above

8. _____ satellites will provide universal broadband Internet

access.
A. GPS
B. Iridium
C. Teledesic
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET-

SET 4
Q-1 Correct Answer :polar
Q-2 Correct Answer :equatorial
Q-3 Correct Answer :MEO
Q-4 Correct Answer :GPS
Q-5 Correct Answer :LEO
Q-6 Correct Answer :Iridium
Q-7 Correct Answer :LEO
Q-8 Correct Answer :Teledesic
Q-9
Q-10
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication
Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – SONET/SDH
multiple choice Questions and Answers (MCQ) PDF covers the
below lists of topics.

1. Advanced Mobile Phone System (AMPS) Multiple Choice

Question and Answer.
Answer
2. Digital AMPS (D--AMPS) Multiple Choice Question an and
Answer.
3. Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) Multiple
Choice Question and Answer.
Answer
4. Interim Standard 95 (IS-95)
(IS Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.
5. satellite network Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
6. geosynchronous Earth orbit (GEO) Multiple Choice
oice Question
and Answer.
7. Global Positioning System (GPS) Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. _______ is a standard developed by ANSI for fiber-optic

optic
networks.
A. SONET
B. SDH
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

2. _______ is a standard developed by ITU-T.

A. SONET
B. SDH
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. either (a) or (b
D. neither (a) nor (b

3. SONET has defined a hierarchy of signals called ________

A. STSs
B. STMs
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

4. SDH has defined a hierarchy of signals called ________.

A. STSs
B. STMs
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

5. An ______ signal is the optical modulation of an STS-n

n (or STM-
n) signal.
A. OC-n
B. TDM-n
C. FDM-n
D. none of the above

6. SONET defines _______ layers.

A. two
B. three
C. four
D. five

7. SONET is a _______ TDM system

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. asynchronous
B. synchronous
C. statistical
D. none of the above

8. A SONET system can use _________

A. STS multiplexers
B. regenerators
C. add/drop multiplexers
D. all of the above

9. SONET sends ________ frames per second

A. 1000
B. 2000
C. 4000
D. 8000

10. In SONET each frame lasts _______ microseconds

A. 20
B. 64
C. 128
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :SONET
Q-2 Correct Answer :SDH
Q-3 Correct Answer :STSs
Q-4 Correct Answer :STMs
Q-5 Correct Answer :OC-n
:OC
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-6 Correct Answer :four

Q-7 Correct Answer :synchronous
Q-8 Correct Answer :all of the above
Q-9 Correct Answer :8000
Q-10 Correct Answer :none of the above

SONET SDH MCQ Set-2

SONET-

1. An STS-1 frame is made of ________ rows

A. 1
B. 9
C. 90
D. none of the above

2. An STS-1 frame is made ______columns

A. 1
B. 9
C. 90
D. none of the above

3. An STS-3 frame is made of ______ rows

A. 1
B. 9
C. 27
D. none of the above

4. An STS-3 frame is made of ________ columns

A. 9
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. 90
C. 270
D. none of the above

5. SONET network topologies can be __________

A. linear
B. ring
C. mesh
D. all of the above

6. A linear SONET network can be __________

A. point-to-point
B. multipoint
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

7. A ring SONET network can be _________

A. unidirectional
B. bidirectional
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

8. To make SONET backward-compatible

backward with the current
hierarchy, its frame design includes a system of.
A. OCs
B. STMs
C. STSs
D. VTs
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

9. A ________ is a repeater
A. regenerator
B. ADM
C. STS multiplexer/demultiplexer
D. none of the above

10. _________ allow insertion and extraction of signals

A. regenerators
B. ADMs
C. STS multiplexer/demultiplexers
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :9
Q-2 Correct Answer :90
Q-3 Correct Answer :9
Q-4 Correct Answer :270
Q-5 Correct Answer :all of the above
Q-6 Correct Answer :either (a) or (b)
Q-7 Correct Answer :either (a) or (b)
Q-8 Correct Answer :VTs
Q-9 Correct Answer :regenerator
Q-10 Correct Answer :ADMs

SONET SDH MCQ Set-3

SONET-

1. A _______ is the optical link connecting two neighbor devices.

A. section
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. line
C. path
D. none of the above

2. A ______ is the portion of the network between two multiplexers.

A. section
B. line
C. path
D. none of the above

3. A ______is the end-to

to-end portion of the network between two
STS multiplexers
A. section
B. line
C. path
D. none of the above

4. The ______ layer is responsible for the movement of a signal

from its optical source to its optical destination
A. section
B. line
C. path
D. photonic

5. The ____ layer is responsible for the movement of a signal across

a physical line.
A. section
B. line
C. path
D. photonic
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

6. The ______ layer is responsible for the movement of a signal

across a physical section
A. section
B. line
C. path
D. photonic

7. The _______ layer corresponds to the physical layer of the OSI

model
A. section
B. line
C. path
D. photonic

8. An STS multiplexer is a ______ device

A. one-layer
B. two-layer
C. three-layer
D. four-layer

9. An add/drop multiplexer is a ______ device

A. one-layer
B. two-layer
C. three-layer
D. four-layer

10. A regenerator is a ________ device

A. one-layer
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. two-layer
C. three-layer
D. four-layer

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer :section
Q-2 Correct Answer :line
Q-3 Correct Answer :path
Q-4 Correct Answer :path
Q-5 Correct Answer :line
Q-6 Correct Answer :section
Q-7 Correct Answer :photonic
Q-8 Correct Answer :four-layer
:four
Q-9 Correct Answer :three-layer
:three
Q-10 Correct Answer :two-layer
:two

SONET SDH MCQ Set-4

SONET-

1. In SONET, for each frame, the bytes are transmitted __________

A. from left to the right, top to bottom
B. from right to the left, bottom to top
C. from left to the right, bottom to top
D. from right to the left, top to bottom

2. In SONET, for each byte, the bits are transmitted ____________

A. from least significant to the most significant
B. from most significant to the least significant
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. two at a time
D. three at a time

3. Each ________in a SONET frame can carry a digitized voice

channel
A. bit
B. byte
C. frame
D. none of the above

4. The section overhead consists of ______octets

A. 1
B. 6
C. 9
D. 18

5. Line overhead consists of ________ bytes

A. 1
B. 6
C. 9
D. 18

6. The path overhead consists of ______ bytes

A. 1
B. 6
C. 9
D. 18
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. In ________ APS, there are normally two lines: one working line
and one protection line. Both lines are active all the time
A. one-plus-one
B. one-to-one
C. one-to-many
D. none of the above

8. In ______ APS, there is one working line and one protection line.
The data are normally sent on the working line until it fails.
A. one-plus-one
B. one-to-one
C. one-to-many
D. none of the above

9. In ________APS, there is only one protection line for many

working lines. When a failure occurs in one of the working lines, the
protection line takes control until the failed line is repaired
A. one-plus-one
B. one-to-one
C. one-to-many
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 4

Q-1 Correct Answer :from left to the right, top to
bottom
Q-2 Correct Answer :from most significant to the
least significant
Q-3 Correct Answer :byte
Q-4 Correct Answer :9
Q-5 Correct Answer :18
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-6 Correct Answer :9

Q-7 Correct Answer :one-plus-one
:one
Q-8 Correct Answer :one-to-one
:one
Q-9 Correct Answer :one-to-many
:one
Q-10
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – VirtualVirtual-Circuit
Networks: Frame Relay and ATM multiple choice Questions and
Answers (MCQ) PDF covers
cover the below lists of topics.

1. Virtual circuit switching Multiple Choice Question and

Answer.
2. Frame Relay Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
3. Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Multiple Choice
Question and Answer.
Answer
4. User-to-network
network interface (UNI) Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.
5. Network-to-network
network interface (NNI) Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. ________ is a virtual-circuit
virtual wide-area network that was designed
in response to demands for a new type of WAN in the late 1980s and
early 1990s.
A. X.25
B. Frame Relay
C. ATM
D. none of the above

2. Frame Relay provides ________

A. PVCs
B. SVCs
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

3. VCIs in Frame Relay are called ______.

A. PVC
B. SVC
C. DLCIs
D. none of the above

4. In Frame Relay, when a _____ is selected, the corresponding

table entry is recorded for all switches by the administrator
A. PVC
B. SVC
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

5. In Frame Relay, when. ______ is selected, it requires establishing

and terminating phases
A. PVC
B. an SVC
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

6. Frame Relay has _______

A. only the physical layer
B. only the data link
C. the physical and data link layers
D. the physical, data link, and network layers

7. At the data link layer, Frame Relay uses a protocol that supports
_____control
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. flow
B. error
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

8. In Frame Relay, an address can be ________ bytes

A. only 2
B. 2 to 3
C. 2 to 4
D. none of the above

9. In Frame Relay, the EA field defines the number of bytes; it is

_____ in the last byte of the address
A. 0
B. 1
C. 2
D. 3

10. To handle frames arriving from other protocols, Frame Relay

uses a device called a _________
A. VOFR
B. FRAD
C. MUX
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :Frame Relay
Q-2 Correct Answer :either (a) or (b)
Q-3 Correct Answer :DLCIs
Q-4 Correct Answer :PVC
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-5 Correct Answer :an SVC

Q-6 Correct Answer :the physical and data link layers
Q-7 Correct Answer :neither (a) nor (b)
Q-8 Correct Answer :2 to 4
Q-9 Correct Answer :1
Q-10 Correct Answer :FRAD

Virtual-Circuit
Circuit Networks: Frame Relay and ATM MCQ Set
Set-2

1. Frame Relay networks offer an option called ______________

that sends voice through the network.
A. VOFR
B. FRAD
C. MUX
D. none of the above

2. ________ is the cell relay protocol designed by the corresponding

Forum and adopted by the ITU-T
A. X.25
B. Frame Relay
C. ATM
D. none of the above

3. A _______ is defined as a small, fixed-size block of information

A. frame
B. packet
C. cell
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. In ATM, a virtual connection is defined by _________

A. VPI
B. VCI
C. DLCI
D. a combination of (a) and (b)

5. The ATM standard defines ______ layers

A. two
B. three
C. four
D. five

6. The VPI of a UNI is _______ bits in length

A. 8
B. 12
C. 16
D. 24

7. The VPI of an NNI is _______ bits in length

A. 8
B. 12
C. 16
D. 24

8. The ATM data packet is a cell composed of ______ bytes

A. 40
B. 50
C. 52
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. 53

9. ______ eliminates the varying delay times associated with

different-size packets
A. X.25
B. Frame Relay
C. ATM
D. all of the above

10. A(n) ______ is the interface between a user and an ATM switch.
A. UNI
B. NNI
C. NNN
D. None of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :VOFR
Q-2 Correct Answer :ATM
Q-3 Correct Answer :cell
Q-4 Correct Answer :a combination of (a) and (b)
Q-5 Correct Answer :three
Q-6 Correct Answer :8
Q-7 Correct Answer :12
Q-8 Correct Answer :53
Q-9 Correct Answer :ATM
Q-10 Correct Answer :UNI

Virtual-Circuit
Circuit Networks: Frame Relay and ATM MCQ Set
Set-3
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

1 ________ is the interface between two ATM switches.

A. UNI
B. NNI
C. NNN
D. none of the above

2. In ATM, connection between two endpoints is accomplished

through _______
A. TPs
B. VPs
C. VCs
D. all of the above

3. In ATM, the _______layer accepts transmissions from upper-

layer services and maps them into ATM cells
A. physical
B. ATM
C. AAL
D. none of the above

4. In ATM, the ______ layer provides routing, traffic management,

switching, and multiplexing services
A. physical
B. ATM
C. AAL
D. none of the above

5. In ATM, the _____ layer defines the transmission medium, bit

transmission, encoding, and electrical-to-optical transformation
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. physical
B. ATM layer
C. AAL
D. none of the above

6. The AAL is divided into _______ sublayers

A. two
B. three
C. four
D. none of the above

7. In ATM, ______ is for constant-bit-rate data.

A. AAL1
B. AAL2
C. AAL3/4
D. AAL5

8. In ATM, _______is for short packets

A. AAL1
B. AAL2
C. AAL3/4
D. AAL5

9. In ATM, _____ is for conventional packet switching (virtual

(virtual-
circuit approach or datagram approach).
A. AAL1
B. AAL2
C. AAL3/4
D. AAL5
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

10. In ATM, ______ is for packets requiring no sequencing and no

error control mechanism.
A. AAL1
B. AAL2
C. AAL3/4
D. AAL5

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer :NNI
Q-2 Correct Answer :all of the above
Q-3 Correct Answer :AAL
Q-4 Correct Answer :ATM
Q-5 Correct Answer :physical
Q-6 Correct Answer :two
Q-7 Correct Answer :AAL1
Q-8 Correct Answer :AAL2
Q-9 Correct Answer :AAL3/4
Q-10 Correct Answer :AAL5
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication
Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – Network Layer:
Logical Addressing multiple choice Questions and Answers
(MCQ) PDF cover the below lists of topics.
topic

1. Packet switching Multiple Choice Question and Answer

Answer.
2. The datagram approach and the virtual circuit approach
Multiple Choice Question and Answer.
Answer
3. Internet address (or IP address) Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.
4. classes of IP addresses Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.
5. Unicast communication Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.
6. Multicast communication
communica Multiple Choice Question and
Answer
7. Subetting ,Subnet masking Multiple Choice Question and
Answer
8. DHCP-dynamic
dynamic configuration protocol Multiple Choice
Question and Answer
9. Network address translation (NAT) Multiple Choice Question
and Answer
10. IP protocol,IPv6 Multiple Choice Question and Answer
11. Next-hop
hop routing ,Network-specific
,Network specific routing ,Host
,Host-
specific routing ,default routing,static routing Multiple Choice
Question and Answer
12. Classless addressing Multiple Choice Question and
Answer

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

1. An IPv4 address consists of _______ bits.

A. 4
B. 8
C. 32
D. 64

2. In IPv4, class _______ has the greatest number of addresses in

each block
A. A
B. B
C. C
D. D

3. Identify the class of the following IPv4 address: 4.5.6.7.

A. A
B. B
C. C
D. none of the above

4. Identify the class of the following IPv4 address: 229.1.2.3.

A. A
B. B
C. D
D. None of the above

5. Identify the class of the following IPv4 address: 191.1.2.3.

A. A
B. B
C. C
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. None of the above

6. What is the result of ANDing 255 and 15?

A. 255
B. 15
C. 0
D. none of the above

7. What is the result of ANDing 0 and 15?

A. 255
B. 15
C. 0
D. None of the above

8. What is the result of ANDing 254 and 15?

A. 254
B. 14
C. 0
D. none of the above

9. What is the result of ANDing 192 and 65?

A. 192
B. 65
C. 64
D. none of the above

10. Which one is not a contiguous mask?

A. 255.255.255.254
B. 255.255.224.0
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. 255.148.0.0
D. all are

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :32
Q-2 Correct Answer :A
Q-3 Correct Answer :A
Q-4 Correct Answer :D
Q-5 Correct Answer :B
Q-6 Correct Answer :15
Q-7 Correct Answer :0
Q-8 Correct Answer :14
Q-9 Correct Answer :64
Q-10 Correct Answer :255.148.0.0

Network Layer: Logical Addressing MCQ Set-2

Set 2

1. The number of addresses in a class C block is _______

A. 65,534
B. 16,777,216
C. 256
D. none of the above

2. The number of addresses in a class B block is _______

A. 65,536
B. 16,777,216
C. 256
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

3. The number of addresses in a class A block is _______

A. 65,534
B. 16,777,216
C. 256
D. none of the above

4. The number of addresses assigned to an organization in classless

addressing _______
A. can be any number
B. must be a multiple of 256
C. must be a power of 2
D. none of the above

5. The first address assigned to an organization in classless

addressing _______
A. must be a power of 4
B. must be evenly divisible by the number of addresses
C. must belong to one of the A, B, or C classes
D. none of the above

6. Which address could be the beginning address of a block

of 32 classless addresses
A. 2.4.6.5
B. 2.4.6.16
C. 2.4.6.64
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. Which address could be the beginning address of a block of 16

classless addresses?
A. 2.4.6.5
B. 2.4.6.15
C. 2.4.6.62
D. none of the above

8. Which address could be the beginning address of a block of 256

classless addresses
A. 2.4.6.5
B. 2.4.6.15
C. 2.4.6.0
D. none of the above

9. What is the first address of a block of classless addresses if one of

the addresses is 12.2.2.76/27?
A. 12.2.2.0
B. 12.2.2.32
C. 12.2.2.64
D. none of the above

10. What is the first address of a block of classless addresses if one

of the addresses is 12.2.2.76/10?
A. 12.0.0.0
B. 12.2.0.0
C. 12.2.2.2
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :256
Q-2 Correct Answer :65,536
Q-3 Correct Answer :16,777,216
Q-4 Correct Answer :must be a power of 2
Q-5 Correct Answer :must be evenly divisible by the
number of addresses
Q-6 Correct Answer :2.4.6.64
Q-7 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-8 Correct Answer :2.4.6.0
Q-9 Correct Answer :12.2.2.64
Q-10 Correct Answer :12.0.0.0

Network Layer: Logical Addressing MCQ Set-3

Set 3

1. What is the first address of a block of classless addresses if one of

the addresses is 12.2.2.127/28?
A. 12.2.2.0
B. 12.2.2.96
C. 12.2.2.112
D. none of the above

2. Find the number of addresses in a block of classless addresses if

one of the addresses is 12.2.2.7/24.
A. 32
B. 64
C. 256
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

3. Find the number of addresses in a block of classless addresses if

one of the addresses is 12.2.2.7/30.
A. 2
B. 4
C. 8
D. none of the above

4. What is the last address of a block of classless addresses if one of

the addresses is 12.2.2.127/28?
A. 12.2.2.16
B. 12.2.2.112
C. 12.2.2.127
D. none of the above

5. What is the last address of a block of classless addresses if one of

the addresses is 12.2.2.6/30?
A. 12.2.2.2
B. 12.2.2.6
C. 12.2.2.7
D. none of the above

6. An organization is granted a block; one address is 2.2.2.64/20.

The organization needs 10 subnets. What is the subnet prefix
length?
A. /20
B. /24
C. /25
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. An organization is granted a block; one address is 2.2.2.64/25. If

the subnet prefix length is /28, what is the maximum number of
subnets?
A. 2
B. 4
C. 8
D. none of the above

8. An organization is granted a block of classless addresses with the

starting address 199.34.76.64/28. How many addresses are granted?
A. 8
B. 16
C. 32
D. none of the above

9. An organization is granted a block of classless addresses with the

starting address 199.34.76.128/29.
199.34.76.1 How many addresses are
granted?
A. 8
B. 16
C. 32
D. none of the above

10. An organization is granted a block of classless addresses with

the starting address 199.34.32.0/27. How many addresses are
granted?
A. 8
B. 16
C. 32
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer :12.2.2.112
Q-2 Correct Answer :256
Q-3 Correct Answer :4
Q-4 Correct Answer :12.2.2.127
Q-5 Correct Answer :12.2.2.7
Q-6 Correct Answer :/24
Q-7 Correct Answer :8
Q-8 Correct Answer :16
Q-9 Correct Answer :8
Q-10 Correct Answer :32

Network Layer: Logical Addressing MCQ Set-4

Set 4

1. In classless addressing, the ______ is another name for the

common part of the address range
A. suffix
B. prefix
C. netid
D. none of the above

2. In classless addressing, the _______ is the varying part (similar to

the hostid).
A. suffix
B. prefix
C. hostid
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

3. In classless addressing, the prefix length defines the

_____________
A. netid
B. hostid
C. mask
D. none of the above

4. In a block, the prefix length is /24; what is the mask?

A. 255.255.255.0
B. 255.255.242.0
C. 255.255.0.0
D. none of the above

5. In a block, the prefix length is /15; what is the mask?

A. 255.254.0.0
B. 255.255.255.0
C. 255.255.255.128
D. none of the above

6. In a block, the mask is 255.255.192.0; what is the prefix length?

A. /20
B. /28
C. /18
D. none of the above

7. An IPv6 address is _________ bits long

A. 32
B. 64
C. 128
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. What is the default mask for class A in CIDR notation?

A. /9
B. /8
C. /16
D. none of the above

9. What is the default mask for class B in CIDR notation?

A. /9
B. /8
C. /16
D. none of the above

10. What is the default mask for class C in CIDR notation?

A. /24
B. /8
C. /16
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 4

Q-1 Correct Answer :prefix
Q-2 Correct Answer :suffix
Q-3 Correct Answer :mask
Q-4 Correct Answer :255.255.255.0
Q-5 Correct Answer :255.254.0.0
Q-6 Correct Answer :/18
Q-7 Correct Answer :128
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-8 Correct Answer :/8

Q-9 Correct Answer :/16
Q-10 Correct Answer :/24

Network Layer: Logical Addressing MCQ Set-5

Set 5

1. An IPv6 address consists of ________ bytes (octets);

A. 4
B. 8
C. 16
D. none of the above

2. To make addresses more readable, IPv6 specifies

____________notation
A. dotted decimal
B. hexadecimal colon
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

3. In hexadecimal colon notation, a 128-bit address is divided into

_______ sections, each _____ hexadecimal digits in length
A. 8: 2
B. 8: 3
C. 8: 4
D. none of the above

4. An IPv6 address can have up to __________ colons

A. 8
B. 7
C. 4
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

5. An IPv6 address can have up to __________ hexadecimal digits

A. 16
B. 32
C. 8
D. none of the above

6. In IPv6, _______ address defines a single computer

A. a unicast
B. a multicast
C. an anycast
D. none of the above

7. In IPv6, ____ address defines a group of computers with

addresses that have the same prefix
A. a unicast
B. a multicast
C. an anycast
D. none of the above

8. In IPv6, _________ address defines a group of computers

A. a unicast
B. a multicast
C. an anycast
D. none of the above

9. In IPv6, the ________ prefix defines the purpose of the address

A. type
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. purpose
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

10. In IPv6, the___________ address is generally used by a normal

host as a unicast address.
A. provider-based
based unicast
B. link local
C. site local
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 5

Q-1 Correct Answer :16
Q-2 Correct Answer :hexadecimal colon
Q-3 Correct Answer :8: 4
Q-4 Correct Answer :7
Q-5 Correct Answer :32
Q-6 Correct Answer :a unicast
Q-7 Correct Answer :an anycast
Q-8 Correct Answer :a multicast
Q-9 Correct Answer :type
Q-10 Correct Answer :provider-based
:provider based unicast
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – Network Layer:
Internet Protocol multiple choice Questions and Answers (MCQ)
PDF covers the below lists of topics.
topic

1. Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Multiple Choice

Question and Answer.
Answer
2. Internet Protocol Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
3. Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) Multiple Choice
Question and Answer.
Answer
4. IPv6 Multiple Choice Question and Answer.
Answer

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. A best-effort delivery service such as IPv4 includes _______.

A. error checking
B. error correction
C. datagram acknowledgment
D. none of the above

2. In IPv4 header, an HLEN value of decimal 10 means _______

A. there are 10 bytes of options
B. there are 40 bytes of options
C. there are 10 bytes in the header
D. there are 40 bytes in the header

3. In IPv4, what is the value of the total length field in bytes if the
header is 28 bytes and the data field is 400 bytes?
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. 428
B. 407
C. 107
D. 427

4. In IPv4, what is the length of the data field given an HLEN value
of 12 and total length value of 40,000?
A. 39,988
B. 40,012
C. 40,048
D. 39,952

5. An IPv4 datagram is fragmented into three smaller datagrams.

Which
of the following is true?
A. The do not fragment bit is set to 1 for all three datagrams.
B. The more fragment bit is set to 0 for all three datagrams
C. The identification field is the same for all three datagrams.
D. The offset field is the same for all three datagrams

6. In IPv4, if the fragment offset has a value of 100, it means that

_____
A. the datagram has not been fragmented
B. the datagram is 100 bytes in i size
C. the first byte of the datagram is byte 100
D. the first byte of the datagram is byte 800

7. In IPv4, what is needed to determine the number of the last byte

of a fragment?
A. Identification number
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. Offset number
C. Total length
D. (b) and (c)

8. The IPv4 header size _______

A. is 20 to 60 bytes long
B. is always 20 bytes long
C. is always 60 bytes long
D. depends on the MTU

9. Which of the following is a necessary part of the IPv6 datagram?

A. Base header
B. Extension header
C. Data packet from the upper layer
D. (a) and (c)

10. In IPv6, the _______ field in the base header restricts the
lifetime of a datagram
A. version
B. next-header
C. hop limit
D. neighbor-advertisement
advertisement

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-2 Correct Answer :there are 40 bytes in the header
Q-3 Correct Answer :428
Q-4 Correct Answer :39,952
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-5 Correct Answer :The identification field is the

same for all three datagrams.
Q-6 Correct Answer :the first byte of the datagram is
byte 800
Q-7 Correct Answer :(b) and (c)
Q-8 Correct Answer :is 20 to 60 bytes long
Q-9 Correct Answer :Base header
Q-10 Correct Answer :hop limit

Network Layer: Internet Protocol MCQ Set-2

Set

1. The ________ protocol is the transmission mechanism used by

the TCP/IP suite.
A. ARP
B. IP
C. RARP
D. none of the above

2. IP is _________ datagram protocol

A. an unreliable
B. a connectionless
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

3. The term ________ means that IP provides no error checking or

tracking. IP assumes the unreliability of the underlying layers and
does its best to get a transmission through to its destination, but
with no guarantees.
A. reliable delivery
B. connection-oriented
oriented delivery
C. best-effort
effort delivery
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

4. In IPv4, an HLEN value of decimal 10 means _______

A. there are 10 bytes of options
B. there are 40 bytes of options
C. there are 40 bytes in the header
D. none of the above

5. In IPv4, which field or bit value unambiguously identifies the

datagram as a fragment?
A. Do not fragment bit ? 0
B. More Fragment bit ? 0
C. Fragment offset = 1000
D. none of the above

6. The IPv4 header size _______

A. is 20 to 60 bytes long
B. is 20 bytes long
C. is 60 bytes long
D. none of the above

7. In IPv4, when a datagram is encapsulated in a frame, the total

size of the datagram must be less than the _______
A. MUT
B. MAT
C. MTU
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. The IPv4 header field formerly known as the service type field is
now called the _______ field
A. IETF
B. checksum
C. differentiated services
D. none of the above

9. In IPv6, options are inserted between the _________ and the

___________ data
A. base header; extension header
B. base header; upper-layer
upper data
C. base header; frame header
D. none of the above

10. IPv6 allows _________ security provisions than IPv4.

A. more
B. less
C. the same level
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :IP
Q-2 Correct Answer :both a and b
Q-3 Correct Answer :best-effort
:best delivery
Q-4 Correct Answer :there are 40 bytes in the header
Q-5 Correct Answer :Fragment offset = 1000
Q-6 Correct Answer :is 20 to 60 bytes long
Q-7 Correct Answer :MTU
Q-8 Correct Answer :differentiated services
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-9 Correct Answer :base header; upper-layer

upper layer data
Q-10 Correct Answer :more
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – Network Layer:
Address Mapping, Error Reporting, and Multicasting multiple
choice Questions and Answers (MCQ) PDF covers the below lists
of topics.

1. RIP and OSPF Multiple Choice Question and Answer

Answer.
2. LSA and BGP Multiple
Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
3. Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Multiple
Choice Question and Answer.
Answer
4. DVRMP Multiple Choice Question and Answer.
Answer
5. Reverse path forwarding (RPF) Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.
6. Reverse path broadcasting (RPB) Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.
7. Core-Based
Based Tree (CBT) protocol Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.
8. PIM-DM – a source-based
source routing protocol Multiple Choice
Question and Answer.
Answer
9. PIM-SM – a group-shared
group routing protocol Multiple Choice
Question and Answer.
Ans

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. A _______ address is an internetwork address with universal

jurisdiction.
A. physical
B. logical
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. a and b
D. none of the above

2. The logical addresses in the Internet are called _______ addresses

A. port
B. IP
C. Email
D. none of the above

3. A ________ is a local address. Its jurisdiction is over a local

network.
A. physical
B. logical
C. a and b
D. none of the above

4. If the sender is a host and wants to send a packet to another host

on the same network, the logical address that must be mapped to a
physical address is ______
A. the destination IP address in the datagram header
B. the IP address of the router found in the routing table
C. either a or b
D. none of the above

5. If the sender is a host and wants to send a packet to another host

on another network, the logical address that must be mapped to a
physical address is ______.
A. the destination IP address in the datagram header
B. the IP address of the router found in the routing table
C. either a or b
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

6. The sender is a router that has received a datagram destined for

a host on another network. The logical address that must be mapped
to a physical address is ______.
A. the destination IP address in the datagram header
B. the IP address of the router found in the routing table
C. either a or b
D. none of the above

7. The sender is a router that has received a datagram destined for

a host on the same network. The logical address that must be
mapped to a physical address is ______.
A. the destination IP address in the datagram header
B. the IP address of the router found in the routing table
C. either a or b
D. none of the above

8. In _______, a table associating a logical address with a physical

address is updated manually.
A. static mapping
B. dynamic mapping
C. physical mapping
D. none of the above

9. _______ is a dynamic mapping protocol in which a physical

address is found for a given logical address.
A. ARP
B. RARP
C. both a and b
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

10. The target hardware address on an Ethernet is _______ in an

ARP request
A. 0x000000000000
B. 0.0.0.0
C. variable
D. class dependent

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :logical
Q-2 Correct Answer :IP
Q-3 Correct Answer :physical
Q-4 Correct Answer :the destination IP address in
the datagram header
Q-5 Correct Answer :the IP address of the router
found in the routing table
Q-6 Correct Answer :the IP address of the router
found in the routing table
Q-7 Correct Answer :the destination IP address in
the datagram header
Q-8 Correct Answer :static mapping
Q-9 Correct Answer :ARP
Q-10 Correct Answer :0x000000000000

Network Layer: Address Mapping, Error Reporting, and Multicasting

MCQ Set-2
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

1. An ARP reply is normally _______

A. broadcast
B. multicast
C. unicast
D. none of the above

2. An ARP request is normally _______

A. broadcast
B. multicast
C. unicast
D. none of the above

3. A technique called ______ is used to create a subnetting effect.

A. ARP
B. RARP
C. proxy ARP
D. none of the above

4. A _______ is an ARP that acts on behalf of a set of hosts

A. ARP
B. RARP
C. proxy ARP
D. none of the above

5. ICMP is a _________ layer protocol

A. data link
B. transport
C. network
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

6. ICMP messages are divided into two broad categories:

_____________
A. query and error reporting messages
B. request and response messages
C. request and reply messages
D. none of the above

7. An ICMP message has _____ header and a variable-size

size data
section
A. a 16-byte
B. a 32-byte
C. an 8-byte
D. none of the above

8. Which of the following is true about ICMP messages?

A. An ICMP error message may be generated for an ICMP
error message
B. An ICMP error message may be generated for each
fragment
C. An ICMP error message may be generated for a multicast
datagram.
D. none is true

9. Which of the following is true about ICMP messages?

A. An ICMP error message may be generated for an ICMP
error message
B. An ICMP error message may be generated only for the first
fragment
C. An ICMP error message may be generated for a multicast
datagram.
D. none is true
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

10. IGMP is a companion to the ______ protocol.

A. UDP
B. TCP
C. ICM
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :unicast
Q-2 Correct Answer :broadcast
Q-3 Correct Answer :proxy ARP
Q-4 Correct Answer :proxy ARP
Q-5 Correct Answer :network
Q-6 Correct Answer :query and error reporting
messages
Q-7 Correct Answer :an 8-byte
8
Q-8 Correct Answer :none is true
Q-9 Correct Answer :An ICMP error message may
be generated only for the first fragment
Q-10 Correct Answer :none of the above

Network Layer: Address Mapping, Error Reporting, and Multicasting

MCQ Set-3

1. IGMP is _______ protocol

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. an error reporting
B. a group management
C. a transmission
D. none of the above

2. IGMP helps a ________ router create and update a list of loyal

members related to each router interface.
A. broadcast
B. unicast
C. multicast
D. none of the above

3. IGMP operates __________

A. locally
B. globally
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

4. An IGMP query is sent from a _ to a _

A. host; host
B. host; router
C. router; host or router
D. none of the above

5. The _______ is used by a router in response to a received leave

report
A. general query message
B. special query message
C. membership report
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

6. The least significant 23 bits in a 48-bit Ethernet address identify a

________
A. multicast router
B. host
C. multicast group
D. none of the above

7. The _______ field of the IGMP message is all zeros in a query

message.
A. version
B. type
C. group address
D. none of the above

8. A multicast message is sent from _ to _.

A. one source; one destination
B. one source; multiple destinations
C. multiple sources; one destination
D. none of the above

9. In networks that do not support physical multicast addressing,

multicasting can be accomplished through _______
A. mapping
B. queries
C. tunneling
D. none of the above

10. If four hosts on a network belong to the same group, a total of

_______ sent in response to a general query message.
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. one membership report is

B. two membership reports are
C. three membership reports are
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer :a group management
Q-2 Correct Answer :multicast
Q-3 Correct Answer :locally
Q-4 Correct Answer :router; host or router
Q-5 Correct Answer :special query message
Q-6 Correct Answer :multicast group
Q-7 Correct Answer :group address
Q-8 Correct Answer :one source; multiple
destinations
Q-9 Correct Answer :tunneling
Q-10 Correct Answer :two membership reports are
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – Network Layer:
Delivery, Forwarding, and Routing multiple choice Questions
and Answers (MCQ) PDF covers the below lists of topic
topics.

1. Transport-layer
layer protocols,UDP and TCP Multiple Choice
Question and Answer.
Answer
2. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) Multiple Choice
Question and Answer.
Answer

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. In _______ delivery, both the deliverer of the IP packet and the

destination are on the same network.
A. a connectionless
B. a direct
C. an indirect
D. none of the above

2. In _______ delivery, the deliverer of the IP packet and the

destination are on different networks
A. a connection-oriented
oriented
B. a direct
C. an indirect
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

3. In _______ forwarding, the full IP address of a destination is

given in the routing table.
A. next-hop
B. network-specific
C. host-specific
D. default

4. In _______ forwarding, the mask and destination addresses are

both 0.0.0.0 in the routing table
A. next-hop
B. network-specific
C. host-specific
D. default

5. In _______ forwarding, the destination address is a network

address in the routing table
A. next-hop
B. network-specific
C. host-specific
D. default

6. In _______ forwarding, the routing table holds the address of just

the next hop instead of complete route information.
A. next-hop
B. network-specific
C. host-specific
D. default

7. The idea of address aggregation was designed to alleviate the

increase in routing table entries when using ________
A. classful addressing
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. classless addressing
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

8. The principle of ________ states that the routing table is sorted

from the longest mask to the shortest mask
A. first mask matching
B. shortest mask matching
C. longest mask matching
D. none of the above

9. The use of hierarchy in routing tables can ________ the size of

the routing tables
A. reduce
B. increase
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

10. _______ deals with the issues of creating and maintaining

routing tables.
A. Forwarding
B. Routing
C. Directing
D. None of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :a direct
Q-2 Correct Answer :an indirect
Q-3 Correct Answer :host-specific
:host
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-4 Correct Answer :default

Q-5 Correct Answer :network-specific
:network
Q-6 Correct Answer :next-hop
:next
Q-7 Correct Answer :classless addressing
Q-8 Correct Answer :longest mask matching
Q-9 Correct Answer :reduce
Q-10 Correct Answer :Routing

Network Layer: Delivery, Forwarding, and Routing MCQ Set

Set-2

1. A _______ routing table contains information entered manually.

A. static
B. dynamic
C. hierarchical
D. none of the above

2. A _______ routing table is updated periodically using one of the

dynamic routing protocols
A. static
B. dynamic
C. hierarchical
D. none of the above

3. The input and output ports of a router perform the ________

layer functions of the router.
A. physical and data link
B. network
C. transport
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. The routing processor of a router performs the ________ layer

functions of the router
A. physical and data link
B. network
C. transport
D. none of the above

5. The task of moving the packet from the input queue to the output
queue in a router is done by _________
A. input and output ports
B. routing processor
C. switching fabrics
D. none of the above

6. A static table is one _______

A. with manual entries
B. which is updated automatically
C. either a or b
D. none of the above

7. A dynamic table is one _______

A. with manual entries
B. which is updated automatically
C. either a or b
D. none of the above

8. For purposes of routing, the Internet is divided into ___________

A. wide area networks
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. autonomous networks
C. autonomous systems
D. none of the above

9. ____________ is a group of networks and routers under the

authority of a single administration.
A. An autonomous system
B. An area
C. a and b
D. none of the above

10. Routing inside an autonomous system is referred to as

_______________
A. interdomain routing
B. intradomain routing
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :static
Q-2 Correct Answer :dynamic
Q-3 Correct Answer :physical and data link
Q-4 Correct Answer :network
Q-5 Correct Answer :switching fabrics
Q-6 Correct Answer :with manual entries
Q-7 Correct Answer :which is updated automatically
Q-8 Correct Answer :autonomous systems
Q-9 Correct Answer :An autonomous system
Q-10 Correct Answer :intradomain routing
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Network Layer: Delivery, Forwarding, and Routing MCQ Set

Set-3

1. Routing between autonomous systems is referred to as

____________
A. interdomain routing
B. intradomain routing
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

2. In _______ routing, the least cost route between any two nodes is
the route with the minimum distance.
A. path vector
B. distance vector
C. link state
D. none of the above

3. In ________, each node maintains a vector (table) of minimum

distances to every node.
A. path vector
B. distance vector
C. link state
D. none of the above

4. In distance vector routing, each node periodically shares its

routing table with _________ and whenever there is a change.
A. every other node
B. its immediate neighbors
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. one neighbor
D. none of the above

5. The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is an intradomain

routing based on _________ routing
A. distance vector
B. link state
C. path vector
D. none of the above

6. The metric used by _______ is the hop count

A. OSPF
B. RIP
C. BGP
D. none of the above

7. The _________ routing uses the Dijkstra algorithm to build a

routing table.
A. distance vector
B. link state
C. path vector
D. none of the above

8. The Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol is an intradomain

routing protocol based on _______ routing
A. distance vector
B. link state
C. path vector
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

9. The _______ protocol allows the administrator to assign a cost,

called the metric, to each route
A. OSPF
B. RIP
C. BGP
D. none of the above

10. In OSPF, a ________ link connects two routers without any

other host or router in between
A. point-to-point
B. transient
C. stub
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer :interdomain routing
Q-2 Correct Answer :distance vector
Q-3 Correct Answer :distance vector
Q-4 Correct Answer :its immediate neighbors
Q-5 Correct Answer :distance vector
Q-6 Correct Answer :RIP
Q-7 Correct Answer :link state
Q-8 Correct Answer :link state
Q-9 Correct Answer :OSPF
Q-10 Correct Answer :point-to-point
:point

Network Layer: Delivery, Forwarding, and Routing MCQ Set

Set-4
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

1. In OSPF, a _______ link is a network with several routers

attached to it.
A. point-to-point
B. transient
C. stub
D. none of the above

2. In OSPF, a ________ link is a network is connected to only one

router.
A. point-to-point
B. transient
C. stub
D. none of the above

3. In OSPF, when the link between two routers is broken, the

administration may create a _________ link between them using a
longer path that probably goes through several routers
A. point-to-point
B. transient
C. stub
D. none of the above

4. In ________ routing, we assume that there is one node (or more)

in each autonomous system that acts on behalf of the entire
autonomous system
A. distant vector
B. path vector
C. link state
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

5. ______ is an interdomain routing protocol using path vector

routing
A. BGP
B. RIP
C. OSPF
D. none of the above

6. To create a neighborhood relationship, a router running BGP

sends an ________ message
A. open
B. update
C. keepalive
D. none of the above

7. An area is _______
A. part of an AS
B. composed of at least two ASs
C. another term for an AS
D. none of the above

8. A one-to-all communication between one source and all hosts on

a network is classified as a _______ communication.
A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. none of the above

9. A one-to-many communication between one source and a specific

group of hosts is classified as a _______ communication.
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. none of the above

10. A one-to-one communication between one source and one

destination is classified as a _______ communication.
A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 4

Q-1 Correct Answer :transient
Q-2 Correct Answer :stub
Q-3 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-4 Correct Answer :path vector
Q-5 Correct Answer :BGP
Q-6 Correct Answer :open
Q-7 Correct Answer :part of an AS
Q-8 Correct Answer :broadcast
Q-9 Correct Answer :multicast
Q-10 Correct Answer :unicast

Network Layer: Delivery, Forwarding, and Routing MCQ Set-5

1. In ______, the router forwards the received packet through only

one of its interfaces.
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. unicasting
B. multicasting
C. broadcasting
D. none of the above

2. In _______, the router may forward the received packet through

several of its interfaces
A. unicasting
B. multicasting
C. broadcasting
D. none of the above

3. Emulation of through ___ is not efficient and

may create long delays.
A. unicasting; multiple unicasting
B. multicasting; multiple unicasting
C. broadcasting; multicasting
D. none of the above

4. In unicast routing, each router in the domain has a table that

defines a ______ path tree to possible destinations
A. average
B. longest
C. shortest
D. none of the above

5. In multicast routing, each involved router needs to construct a

________ path tree for each group.
A. average
B. longest
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. shortest
D. none of the above

6. In the _______ tree approach, each router needs to have one

shortest path tree for each group.
A. group-shared
B. source-based
C. a or b
D. none of the above

7. In the group-shared tree approach, _________ involved in

multicasting
A. only the core router is
B. all routers are
C. only some routers are
D. none of the above

8. Multicast link state routing uses the _______ tree approach

A. source-based
B. group-shared
C. a or b
D. none of the above

9. The Multicast Open Shortest Path First (MOSPF) protocol is an

extension of the OSPF protocol that uses multicast routing to create
source-based trees. The protocol is based on _______ routing
A. distance vector
B. link state
C. path vector
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

10. MOSPF is a _______ protocol

A. data-driven
B. command-driven
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 5

Q-1 Correct Answer :unicasting
Q-2 Correct Answer :multicasting
Q-3 Correct Answer :multicasting; multiple unicasting
Q-4 Correct Answer :shortest
Q-5 Correct Answer :shortest
Q-6 Correct Answer :source-based
:source
Q-7 Correct Answer :only the core router is
Q-8 Correct Answer :source-based
:source
Q-9 Correct Answer :link state
Q-10 Correct Answer :data-driven
:data

Network Layer: Delivery, Forwarding, and Routing MCQ Set

Set-6

1. _________ broadcasts packets, but creates loops in the systems.

A. Forwarding
B. Flooding
C. Backwarding
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

2. In RPF, a router forwards only the copy that has traveled the
_______ path from the source to the router.
A. shortest
B. longest
C. average
D. none of the above

3. RPF eliminates the ________ in the flooding process

A. forwarding
B. backwarding
C. flooding
D. none of the above

4. RPF guarantees that each network receives only ____ of the

multicast packet.
A. one copy
B. two copies
C. a or b
D. none of the above

5. RPB creates a shortest path _______ tree from the source to each
destination
A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. none of the above

6. RPB guarantees that each destination receives _________ of the

packet
A. one copy
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. no copies
C. multiple copies
D. none of the above

7. In ________, the multicast packet must reach only those

networks that have active members for that particular group.
A. RPF
B. RPB
C. RPM
D. none of the above

8. adds pruning and grafting to _ to create a

multicast shortest path tree that supports dynamic membership
changes
A. RPM; RPB
B. RPB; RPM
C. RPF: RPM
D. none of the above

9. _________ is an implementation of multicast distance vector

routing.
It is a source-based routing protocol, based on RIP.
A. MOSPF
B. DVMRP
C. CBT
D. none of the above

10. DVMRP is a ________routing protocol, based on RIP

A. source-based
B. group-shared
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. both a and b
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 6

Q-1 Correct Answer :Flooding
Q-2 Correct Answer :shortest
Q-3 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-4 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-5 Correct Answer :broadcast
Q-6 Correct Answer :one copy
Q-7 Correct Answer :RPM
Q-8 Correct Answer :RPM; RPB
Q-9 Correct Answer :DVMRP
Q-10 Correct Answer :source-based
:source

Network Layer: Delivery, Forwarding, and Routing MCQ Set-7

1. Pruning and grafting are strategies used in _______

A. RPF
B. RPB
C. RPM
D. none of the above

2. A _______ message tells an upstream router to stop sending

multicast messages for a specific group through a specific router.
A. weed
B. graft
C. prune
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

3. A _______ message tells an upstream router to start sending

multicast messages for a specific group through a specific router.
A. weed
B. graft
C. prune
D. none of the above

4. CBT is a ________ protocol that uses a core as the root of the tree
A. source-based
B. group-shared
C. a or b
D. none of the above

5. PIM-DM is used in a _______ multicast environment, such as a

LAN.
A. dense
B. sparse
C. a or b
D. none of the above

6. PIM-SM is used in a _______multicast environment such as a

WAN.
A. dense
B. sparse
C. a or b
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. In _______, a logical tunnel is established by encapsulating the

multicast packet inside a unicast packet.
A. UNIBONE
B. MULTBONE
C. MBONE
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 7

Q-1 Correct Answer :RPM
Q-2 Correct Answer :prune
Q-3 Correct Answer :graft
Q-4 Correct Answer :group-shared
:group
Q-5 Correct Answer :dense
Q-6 Correct Answer :sparse
Q-7 Correct Answer :MBONE
Q-8
Q-9
Q-10
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – Process-toto-Process
Delivery: UDP, TCP, and SCTP multiple choice Questions and
Answers (MCQ) PDF cover the below lists of topics.
topic

1. Average data rate, peak data rate, maximum burst size, and
effective band-width
width Multiple
ple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
2. Congestion control Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
3. Open-loop
loop congestion control Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.
4. Quality of service (QoS), Scheduling, traffic shaping,
resource reservation, and admission control techniques
Multiple Choice Question and Answer.
Answer
5. Scheduling techniques ,FIFO queuing, priority queuing, and
weighted fair queuing Multiple Choice Question and Answer.
6. traffic shaping techniques ,Leaky bucket and token
bucket Multiple Choice Question and Answer
7. Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)-
(RSVP) a signaling
protocol Multiple Choice Question and Answer
8. Differential Services – a class-based QoS model Multiple
Choice Question and Answer
9. Attributes to control traffic in Frame Relay,Access rate,
committed burst size, committed information rate, and
excess burst size Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. One of the responsibilities of the transport layer protocol is to

create a ______ communication.
A. host-to-host
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. process-to-process
process
C. node-to-node
D. none of the above

2. UDP is called a ________________transport protocol.

A. connectionless, reliable
B. connection-oriented,
oriented, unreliable
C. connectionless, unreliable
D. none of the above

3. UDP does not add anything to the services of IP except for

providing _______ communication
A. node-to-node
B. process-to-process
process
C. host-to-host
D. none of the above

4. UDP is an acronym for _______

A. User Delivery Protocol
B. User Datagram Procedure
C. User Datagram Protocol
D. none of the above

5. Although there are several ways to achieve process-to--process

communication, the most common is through the __________
paradigm
A. client-server
B. client-client
C. server-server
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

6. The local host and the remote host are defined using IP
addresses. To define the processes, we need second identifiers called
____________
A. UDP addresses
B. transport addresses
C. port addresses
D. none of the above

7. The ports ranging from 49,152 to 65,535 can be used as

temporary or
private port numbers. They are called the ________ ports
A. well-known
B. registered
C. dynamic
D. none of the above

8. In the sending computer, UDP receives a data unit from the

_______ layer.
A. application
B. transport
C. IP
D. none of the above

9. In the sending computer, UDP sends a data unit to the _______

layer
A. application
B. transport
C. IP
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

10. UDP and TCP are both _______ layer protocols

A. data link
B. network
C. transport
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :process-to-process
:process
Q-2 Correct Answer :connectionless, unreliable
Q-3 Correct Answer :process-to-process
:process
Q-4 Correct Answer :User Datagram Protocol
Q-5 Correct Answer :client-server
:client
Q-6 Correct Answer :port addresses
Q-7 Correct Answer :dynamic
Q-8 Correct Answer :application
Q-9 Correct Answer :IP
Q-10 Correct Answer :transport

Process-to-Process
Process Delivery: UDP, TCP, and SCTP multiple choice
questions and answers MCQ Set-2
Set

1. Which of the following functions does UDP perform?

A. process-to-process
process communication
B. host-to-host
host communication
C. end-to-end
end reliable data delivery
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

2. When the IP layer of a receiving host receives a datagram,

_______
A. delivery is complete
B. a transport layer protocol takes over
C. a header is added
D. none of the above

3. UDP needs the _______ address to deliver the user datagram to

the correct application process
A. port
B. application
C. internet
D. none of the above

4. A port address in UDP is _______bits long.

A. 8
B. 16
C. 32
D. any of the above

5. Which of the following does UDP guarantee?

A. flow control
B. connection-oriented
oriented delivery
C. flow control
D. none of the above

6. The source port address on the UDP user datagram header

defines _______
A. the sending computer
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. the receiving computer

C. the process running on the sending computer
D. none of the above

7. The combination of an IP address and a port number is called a

____________
A. transport address
B. network address
C. socket address
D. none of the above

8. To use the services of UDP, we need ________ socket addresses

A. four
B. two
C. three
D. none of the above

9. UDP packets are called __________

A. user datagrams
B. segments
C. frames
D. none of the above

10. UDP packets have a fixed-size header of _______ bytes

A. 6
B. 8
C. 40
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :process-to-process
:process
communication
Q-2 Correct Answer :a transport layer protocol takes
over
Q-3 Correct Answer :port
Q-4 Correct Answer :16
Q-5 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-6 Correct Answer :the process running on the
sending computer
Q-7 Correct Answer :socket address
Q-8 Correct Answer :two
Q-9 Correct Answer :user datagrams
Q-10 Correct Answer :8

Process-to-Process
Process Delivery: UDP, TCP, and SCTP multiple choice
questions and answers MCQ Set-3
Set

1. UDP packets are encapsulated in ___________

A. an Ethernet frame
B. an TCP segment
C. an IP datagram
D. none of the above

2. UDP uses ________ to handle outgoing user datagrams from

multiple processes on one host
A. flow control
B. multiplexing
C. demultiplexing
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

3. UDP uses _______ to handle incoming user datagrams that go to

different processes on the same host.
A. flow control
B. multiplexing
C. demultiplexing
D. none of the above

4. TCP is a __________protocol
A. stream-oriented
B. message-oriented
oriented
C. block-oriented
D. none of the above

5. TCP allows the sending process to deliver data as a _______of

bytes and allows the receiving process to obtain data as a _________
of bytes
A. message; message
B. stream; stream
C. block; block
D. none of the above

6. Because the sending and the receiving processes may not write or
read data at the same speed, TCP ________
A. speeds up the slower process
B. slows down the faster process
C. uses buffers
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. TCP groups a number of bytes together into a packet called a

___________
A. user datagram
B. segment
C. datagram
D. none of the above

8. TCP is a ___________ protocol.

A. connection-oriented
oriented
B. connectionless
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

9. TCP is a(n) _______ transport protocol

A. unreliable
B. best-effort
effort delivery
C. reliable
D. none of the above

10. TCP uses _________________ to check the safe and sound

arrival of data.
A. an acknowledgment mechanism
B. out-of-band
band signalling
C. the services of another protocol
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer :an IP datagram
Q-2 Correct Answer :multiplexing
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-3 Correct Answer :demultiplexing

Q-4 Correct Answer :stream-oriented
:stream
Q-5 Correct Answer :stream; stream
Q-6 Correct Answer :uses buffers
Q-7 Correct Answer :segment
Q-8 Correct Answer :connection-oriented
:connection
Q-9 Correct Answer :reliable
Q-10 Correct Answer :an acknowledgment
mechanism

Process-to-Process
Process Delivery: UDP, TCP, and SCTP multiple choice
questions and answers MCQ Set-4
Set

1. The bytes of data being transferred in each connection are

numbered by TCP. The numbering starts with a
__________________
A. 0
B. 1
C. randomly generated number
D. none of the above

2. TCP assigns a sequence number to each segment that is being

sent. The sequence number for each segment is the number of the
_______ byte carried in that segment.
A. first
B. last
C. middle
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

3. Communication in TCP is ___________

A. simplex
B. half-duplex
C. full-duplex
D. none of the above

4. The value of the acknowledgment field in a segment defines the

number of the ______byte a party expects to receive
A. first
B. last
C. next
D. none of the above

5. The acknowledgment number is ________

A. independent
B. randomly generated
C. cumulative
D. none of the above

6. The value of the window size is determined by _________

A. the sender
B. the receiver
C. both the sender and receiver
D. none of the above

7. The inclusion of the checksum in the TCP segment is ________

A. optional
B. mandatory
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. at the discretion of the application program

D. none of the above

8. A TCP segment is encapsulated in __________

A. an IP datagram
B. an Ethernet frame
C. a UDP user datagram
D. none of the above

9. Connection establishment in TCP is called __________

handshaking
A. two-way
B. four-way
C. one-way
D. none of the above

10. A SYN segment cannot carry data; it consumes _____ sequence

number(s).
A. no
B. one
C. two
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 4

Q-1 Correct Answer :randomly generated number
Q-2 Correct Answer :first
Q-3 Correct Answer :full-duplex
:full
Q-4 Correct Answer :next
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-5 Correct Answer :cumulative

Q-6 Correct Answer :the receiver
Q-7 Correct Answer :mandatory
Q-8 Correct Answer :an IP datagram
Q-9 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-10 Correct Answer :One

Process-to-Process
Process Delivery: UDP, TCP, and SCTP multiple choice
questions and answers MCQ Set-5
Set

1. A SYN + ACK segment cannot carry data; it consumes _____

sequence number(s).
A. no
B. three
C. two
D. none of the above

2. An ACK segment, if carrying no data, consumes ______ sequence

number(s).
A. no
B. one
C. two
D. none of the above

3. The connection establishment procedure in TCP is susceptible to

a serious security problem called the _________ attack.
A. ACK flooding
B. FIN flooding
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. SYN flooding
D. none of the above

4. The SYN flooding attack belongs to a group of security attacks

known as a _____ attack
A. denial of service
B. replay
C. man-in-the
the middle
D. none of the above

5. The FIN segment consumes ____ sequence numbers if it does not

carry data.
A. two
B. three
C. no
D. none of the above

6. The FIN + ACK segment consumes _____ sequence number(s) if

it does not carry data
A. two
B. three
C. one
D. none of the above

7. In TCP, one end can stop sending data while still receiving data.
This is called a ______.
A. half-close
B. half-open
C. one-way
way termination
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. A(n) _________ machine is a machine that goes through a limited

number of states.
A. infinite state
B. finite state
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

9. _____ control regulates the amount of data a source can send

before receiving an acknowledgment from the destination.
A. Error
B. Flow
C. Congestion
D. none of the above

10. To accomplish flow control, TCP uses a ___________ window

protocol
A. limited-size
B. sliding
C. fixed-size
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 5

Q-1 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-2 Correct Answer :no
Q-3 Correct Answer :SYN flooding
Q-4 Correct Answer :denial of service
Q-5 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-6 Correct Answer :one
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-7 Correct Answer :half-close

:half
Q-8 Correct Answer :finite state
Q-9 Correct Answer :Flow
Q-10 Correct Answer :sliding

Process-to-Process
Process Delivery: UDP, TCP, and SCTP multiple choice
questions and answers MCQ Set-6
Set

1. TCP sliding windows are __________ oriented

A. packet
B. segment
C. byte
D. none of the above

2. ACK segments consume _______ sequence number(s) and

_______ acknowledged
A. no; are not
B. one; are not
C. no; are
D. none of the above

3. TCP delivers _______ out-of-order segments to the process

A. all
B. no
C. some
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. IP is responsible for _______ communication while TCP is

responsible for _______ communication
A. host-to-host;
host; process-to-process
process
B. process-to-process;
process; host-to-host
host
C. process-to-process;
process; network-to-network
network
D. none of the above

5. If a segment carries data along with an acknowledgment, this is

called _______
A. backpacking
B. piggybacking
C. piggypacking
D. none of the above

6. Multiply the header length field by _______ to find the total

number of bytes in the TCP header
A. 2
B. 4
C. 6
D. none of the above

7. Urgent data requires the urgent pointer field as well as the URG
bit in the _______ field
A. control
B. offset
C. sequence number
D. none of the above

8. The options field of the TCP header ranges from 0 to _______

bytes.
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. 10
B. 20
C. 40
D. none of the above

9. If the ACK value is 200, then byte _______ has been received
successfully
A. 199
B. 200
C. 201
D. none of the above

10. Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) is a new

_____________protocol.
A. reliable, character-oriented
character
B. reliable, message-oriented
message
C. unreliable, message-oriented
message
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 6

Q-1 Correct Answer :byte
Q-2 Correct Answer :no; are not
Q-3 Correct Answer :no
Q-4 Correct Answer :host-to-host;
:host process--to-
process
Q-5 Correct Answer :piggybacking
Q-6 Correct Answer :4
Q-7 Correct Answer :control
Q-8 Correct Answer :40
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-9 Correct Answer :199

Q-10 Correct Answer :reliable, message-oriented
message oriented

Process-to-Process
Process Delivery: UDP, TCP, and SCTP multiple choice
questions and answers MCQ Set-7
Set

1. SCTP allows __________ service in each association

A. single stream
B. multistream
C. double stream
D. none of the above

2. SCTP association allows _____________ for each end

A. only one IP address
B. multiple IP addresses
C. only two IP address
D. none of the above

3. In SCTP, a data chunk is numbered using ________

A. a TSN
B. an SI
C. an SSN
D. none of the above

4. To distinguish between different streams, SCTP uses

___________
A. a TSN
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. an SI
C. an SSN
D. none of the above

5. To distinguish between different data chunks belonging to the

same stream, SCTP uses ___________
A. TSNs
B. SIs
C. SSNs
D. none of the above

6. TCP has ; SCTP has

A. packets; segments
B. segments; packets
C. segments; frames
D. none of the above

7. The control information in SCTP is included in the ________

A. header control field
B. control chunks
C. data chunks
D. none of the above

8. An SCTP packet can carry __________

A. only one data chunk
B. several data chunks
C. no data chunks
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

9. In SCTP, the acknowledgment number and window size are part

of each ________
A. data chunk
B. control chunk
C. a or b
D. none of the above

10. There is no need for a header length field in SCTP because

________________
A. there are no options in the general header
B. the size of the header is fixed
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 7

Q-1 Correct Answer :multistream
Q-2 Correct Answer :multiple IP addresses
Q-3 Correct Answer :a TSN
Q-4 Correct Answer :an SI
Q-5 Correct Answer :SSNs
Q-6 Correct Answer :segments; packets
Q-7 Correct Answer :control chunks
Q-8 Correct Answer :several data chunks
Q-9 Correct Answer :control chunk
Q-10 Correct Answer :both a and b
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Process-to-Process
Process Delivery: UDP, TCP, and SCTP multiple choice
questions and answers MCQ Set-8
Set

1. The checksum in SCTP is ________ bits.

A. 16
B. 32
C. 64
D. none of the above

2. The association identifier in SCTP is __________________

A. a unique verification tag
B. a combination of logical and port addresses
C. either a or b
D. none of the above

3. In SCTP, control information and data information are carried

in _______ chunks.
A. the same chunk
B. different chunks
C. either a or b
D. none of the above

4. In SCTP, acknowledgment numbers are used to acknowledge

_____________
A. both data chunks and control chunks
B. only control chunks
C. only data chunks
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

5. In an SCTP packet, control chunks come ___________ data

chunks
A. after
B. before
C. a or b
D. none of the above

6. In SCTP, ___________ can be carried in a packet that carries an

INIT chunk
A. only data chunks
B. only control chunks
C. no other chunk
D. none of the above

7. A connection in SCTP is called an ____________

A. negotiation
B. association
C. transmission
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 8

Q-1 Correct Answer :32
Q-2 Correct Answer :a unique verification tag
Q-3 Correct Answer :different chunks
Q-4 Correct Answer :only data chunks
Q-5 Correct Answer :before
Q-6 Correct Answer :no other chunk
Q-7 Correct Answer :association
Q-8
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-9
Q-10
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – Domain Name
System multiple choice Questions and Answers (MCQ
MCQ) PDF
covers the below lists of topics.
topic

1. DNS client Multiple Choice Question and Answer.

Answer.
2. Recursive resolution Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
3. Iterative resolution Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
4. Fully qualified Doman name (FQDN) Multiple Choice
Question and Answer.
Answer
5. Partially qualified domain name (PQDN) Multiple Choice
Question and Answer.
Answer
6. DNS messages Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
7. DNS records Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
8. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. In a _______ name space, a name is assigned to an address. A

name in this space is a sequence of characters without structure.
A. flat
B. hierarchical
C. organized
D. none of the above

2. In a _________name space, each name is made of several parts.

A. flat
B. hierarchical
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. organized
D. none of the above

3. To have a hierarchical name space, a ______________ was

designed.
A. domain space
B. domain name
C. domain name space
D. none of the above

4. In the DNS, the names are defined in ___________ structure

A. a linear list
B. an inverted-tree
C. a graph
D. none of the above

5. Each node in the tree has a _______, which is a string with a

maximum of ___ characters.
A. label; 127
B. name; 255
C. label; 63
D. none of the above

6. The root of the DNS tree is _______.

A. a string of characters
B. a string of 63 characters
C. an empty string
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. A full domain name is a sequence of labels separated by

________.
A. semicolons
B. dots
C. colons
D. none of the above

8. If a label is terminated by a null string, it is called a __________.

A. PQDN
B. FQDN
C. SQDN
D. none of the above

9. If a label is not terminated by a null string, it is called a

__________.
A. PQDN
B. FQDN
C. SQDN
D. none of the above

10. A _________ is a subtree of the domain name space.

A. label
B. name
C. domain
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :flat
Q-2 Correct Answer :hierarchical
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-3 Correct Answer :domain name space

Q-4 Correct Answer :an inverted-tree
inverted
Q-5 Correct Answer :label; 63
Q-6 Correct Answer :an empty string
Q-7 Correct Answer :dots
Q-8 Correct Answer :FQDN
Q-9 Correct Answer :PQDN
Q-10 Correct Answer :domain

Domain Name System multiple choice questions and answers MCQ Set
Set-2

1. What a server is responsible for or has authority over is called a

_________.
A. domain
B. label
C. zone
D. none of the above

2. A _______ is a server whose zone consists of the whole tree.

A. domain server
B. zone server
C. root server
D. none of the above

3. A ________ server loads all information from the disk file

A. primary
B. secondary
C. zone
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. A ________ server loads all information from the primary server.

A. primary
B. secondary
C. zone
D. none of the above

5. When the secondary downloads information from the primary, it

is called ______ transfer
A. domain
B. zone
C. label
D. none of the above

6. In the Internet, the domain name space (tree) is divided into

_______ different sections
A. three
B. two
C. four
D. none of the above

7. The _______ domains define registered hosts according to their

generic behavior.
A. generic
B. country
C. inverse
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. The first level in the generic domains section allows ______

possible labels
A. 10
B. 12
C. 16
D. none of the above

9. The ____________ domain section uses two-character country

abbreviations
A. generic
B. country
C. inverse
D. none of the above

10. The _________ domain is used to map an address to a name.

A. generic
B. country
C. inverse
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :zone
Q-2 Correct Answer :root server
Q-3 Correct Answer :primary
Q-4 Correct Answer :secondary
Q-5 Correct Answer :zone
Q-6 Correct Answer :three
Q-7 Correct Answer :generic
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-8 Correct Answer :none of the above

Q-9 Correct Answer :country
Q-10 Correct Answer :inverse

Domain Name System multiple choice questions and answers MCQ Set
Set-3

1. In _________ resolution, the resolver expects the server to supply

the final answer
A. iterative
B. recursive
C. straight
D. none of the above

2. In __________ resolution, the server returns the IP address of the

server that it thinks can resolve the query.
A. iterative
B. recursive
C. straight
D. none of the above

3. In the domain name chal.atc.fhda.edu, _______ is the least

specific label.
A. chal
B. atc
C. edu
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. In the domain name chal.atc.fhda.edu, _______ is the most

specific label
A. chal
B. atc
C. fhda
D. none of the above

5. A host with the domain name pit.arc.nasa.gov. is on the _______

level of the DNS hierarchical tree. (The root is level one.)
A. third
B. fourth
C. fifth
D. none of the above

6. A pointer query involves the _______ domain

A. inverse
B. reverse
C. root
D. none of the above

7. DNS can use the services of ________ using the well-known

known port
53.
A. UDP
B. TCP
C. either (a) or (b)
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer :recursive
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-2 Correct Answer :iterative

Q-3 Correct Answer :edu
Q-4 Correct Answer :chal
Q-5 Correct Answer :fifth
Q-6 Correct Answer :inverse
Q-7 Correct Answer :either (a) or (b)
Q-8
Q-9
Q-10
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – Remote Logging,
Electronic Mail, and File Transfer multiple choice Questions
and Answers (MCQ) PDF covers the below lists of topic
topics.

1. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) MCQs.

2. Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension (MIME) MCQs.
3. Post Office Protocol, version 3 (POP3) and Internet Mail
Access Protocol, version 4 (IMAP4) MCQs.
4. File transfer protocol (FTP) – a TCP/IP client-server
server
application MCQs.

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. TELNET is an abbreviation for ____________.

A. terminal network
B. telephone network
C. telecommunication network
D. none of the above

2. TELNET is a ________ client-server application program.

A. specific-purpose
B. general-purpose
C. both a and b
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

3. When a user logs into a local time-sharing system, it is called

________ login.
A. local
B. remote
C. temporary
D. none of the above

4. When a user wants to access an application program or utility

located on a remote machine, he or she performs ___________ login.
A. local
B. remote
C. temporary
D. none of the above

5. NVT uses two sets of characters, one for _____and one for
__________
A. sending; receiving
B. request; reply
C. data; control
D. none of the above

6. For data, NVT uses US ASCII characters with the highest order
bit set to ______
A. 1
B. 0
C. a or b
D. none of the above

7. For control, NVT uses US ASCII characters with the highest

order bit set to ______.
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. 1
B. 0
C. a or b
D. none of the above

8. TELNET uses only one TCP connection. The server uses

________ port and the client uses ________ port
A. a well-known;
known; another well-known
B. an ephemeral; another ephemeral
C. a well-known;
known; an ephemeral
D. none of the above

9. To distinguish data from control characters, each sequence of

control characters is preceded by a special control character called
________.
A. ICA
B. IAC
C. AIC
D. none of the above

10. In the _______ mode, the echoing is done by the client.

A. default
B. character
C. line
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :terminal network
Q-2 Correct Answer :general-purpose
:general
Q-3 Correct Answer :local
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-4 Correct Answer :remote

Q-5 Correct Answer :data; control
Q-6 Correct Answer :0
Q-7 Correct Answer :1
Q-8 Correct Answer :a well-known;
well known; an ephemeral
Q-9 Correct Answer :IAC
Q-10 Correct Answer :default

Remote Logging, Electronic Mail, and File Transfer multiple choice

questions and answers MCQ Set-2
Set

1. If the sender wants an option enabled by the receiver, it sends a

_______ command
A. WILL
B. DO
C. WONT
D. none of the above

2. _______ is the standard mechanism provided by TCP/IP for

copying a file from one host to another
A. TELNET
B. SMTP
C. TFTP
D. none of the above

3. In the _______ mode, each character typed is sent by the client to

the server.
A. default
B. character
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. line
D. none of the above

4. In the ____ mode, line editing (echoing, character erasing, line

erasing, and so on) is done by the client
A. default
B. character
C. line
D. none of the above

5. The _______ is software residing on the remote system that

allows the remote system to receive characters from a TELNET
server
A. terminal driver
B. pseudoterminal driver
C. TELNET client
D. none of the above

6. The _______ translates local characters into NVT form

A. terminal driver
B. TELNET client
C. TELNET server
D. none of the above

7. The _______ translates NVT characters into a form acceptable by

the remote operating system.
A. terminal driver
B. TELNET client
C. TELNET server
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. If the sender wants to disable an option, it sends a _______

command.
A. WILL
B. DO
C. WONT
D. none of the above

9. If the sender wants to enable an option, it sends a _______

command
A. WILL
B. DO
C. WONT
D. none of the above

10. If the sender wants an option disabled by the receiver, it sends a

_______ command
A. WILL
B. DO
C. DONT
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :DO
Q-2 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-3 Correct Answer :character
Q-4 Correct Answer :line
Q-5 Correct Answer :pseudoterminal driver
Q-6 Correct Answer :TELNET client
Q-7 Correct Answer :TELNET server
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-8 Correct Answer :WONT

Q-9 Correct Answer :WILL
Q-10 Correct Answer :DONT

Remote Logging, Electronic Mail, and File Transfer multiple choice

questions and answers MCQ Set-3
Set

1. FTP uses the services of ________

A. UDP
B. IP
C. TCP
D. none of the above

2. In FTP, the well-known

known port ____ is used for the control
connection and the well-known
well port ________ for the data
connection
A. 21; 22
B. 21; 20
C. 20; 21
D. none of the above

3. In FTP, _______ is the service type used by the IP protocol

because this is an interactive connection between a user (human)
and a server
A. maximize throughput
B. minimize delay
C. minimize error
D. none of the above
bove
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. For the control connection, FTP uses the __________ character

set
A. regular ASCII
B. EBCDIC
C. NVT ASCII
D. none of the above

5. During an FTP session the control connection is opened _______

A. exactly once
B. exactly twice
C. as many times as necessary
D. none of the above

6. During an FTP session the data connection is opened _______

A. exactly once
B. exactly twice
C. as many times as necessary
D. none of the above

7. In FTP, a file can be organized into records, pages, or a stream of

bytes. These are types of an attribute called _______
A. file types
B. data structures
C. transmission modes
D. none of the above

8. In FTP, there are three types of _______: stream, block, and

compressed
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. file types
B. data structures
C. transmission modes
D. none of the above

9. In FTP, ASCII, EBCDIC, and image define an attribute called

_______
A. file type
B. data structure
C. transmission mode
D. none of the above

10. In FTP, when we _______, it is copied from the server to the

client.
A. retrieve a file
B. retrieve a list
C. a and c
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer :TCP
Q-2 Correct Answer :21; 20
Q-3 Correct Answer :minimize delay
Q-4 Correct Answer :NVT ASCII
Q-5 Correct Answer :exactly once
Q-6 Correct Answer :as many times as necessary
Q-7 Correct Answer :data structures
Q-8 Correct Answer :transmission modes
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-9 Correct Answer :file type

Q-10 Correct Answer :a and c

Remote Logging, Electronic Mail, and File Transfer multiple choice

questions and answers MCQ Set-4
Set

1. In FTP, when we _______, it is copied from the client to the

server.
A. retrieve a file
B. store a file
C. retrieve a list
D. none of the above

2. ________ is part of a local hard drive, a special file with

permission restrictions
A. A message
B. A response
C. An agent
D. None of the above

3. When the sender and the receiver of an email are on the same
system, we need only ___________
A. one UA
B. two UAs
C. one UA and one MTA
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. When the sender and the receiver of an email are on different

systems, we need only _____________
A. one MTA
B. two UAs
C. two UAs and one pair of MTAs
D. none of the above

5. When the sender is connected to the mail server via a LAN or a

WAN, we need ______________
A. two MTA
B. two UAs and two pairs of MTAs
C. two UAs and a pair of MTAs
D. none of the above

6. When both sender and receiver are connected to a mail server via
a LAN or a WAN, we need ___________________
A. two UAs, two pairs of MTAs, and a pair of MAAs
B. two UAs, and two pairs of MTAs
C. two UAs, two pairs of MTAs, and two pairs of MAAs
D. none of the above

7. ________ provides service to the user to make the process of

sending and receiving a message easier
A. An MTA
B. An MAA
C. A UA
D. none of the above

8. Which of the following services is not provided by a UA?

A. composing messages
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. reading messages
C. replying messages
D. all are

9. There are two types of user agents: _ and ___

A. command-driven;
driven; data-driven
data
B. command-driven;
driven; GUI-based
GUI
C. command-based
based and data-based
data
D. none of the above

10. The ________ usually contains the sender address, the receiver
address, and other information
A. message
B. envelope
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 4

Q-1 Correct Answer :store a file
Q-2 Correct Answer :None of the above
Q-3 Correct Answer :two UAs
Q-4 Correct Answer :two UAs and one pair of MTAs
Q-5 Correct Answer :two UAs and two pairs of MTAs
Q-6 Correct Answer :two UAs, two pairs of MTAs,
and a pair of MAAs
Q-7 Correct Answer :A UA
Q-8 Correct Answer :all are
Q-9 Correct Answer :command-driven;
:command driven; GUI
GUI-based
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-10 Correct Answer :envelope

Remote Logging, Electronic Mail, and File Transfer multiple choice

questions and answers MCQ Set-5
Set

1. The message contains the and the __

A. header; envelop
B. header; body
C. envelop; body
D. none of the above

2. In the Internet, the email address consists of two parts: a _______

and a _______
A. local part; domain name
B. global part; domain name
C. label; domain name
D. none of the above

3. _________ is a supplementary protocol that allows non

non-ASCII
data to be sent through email.
A. JPEG
B. MPEG
C. MIME
D. none of the above

4. The actual mail transfer is done through ____________

A. UAs
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. MTAs
C. MAAs
D. none of the above

5. The formal protocol that defines the MTA client and server in the
Internet is called ___________
A. SMTP
B. SNMP
C. TELNET
D. none of the above

6. The process of transferring a mail message occurs in ________

phases
A. two
B. four
C. five
D. none of the above

7. SMTP is a __________protocol
A. pull
B. push
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

8. The third stage in an email transfer needs a ________ protocol

A. pull
B. push
C. both a and b
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

9. The third stage in an email transfer uses a(n) ________ protocol

A. UA
B. MTA
C. MAA
D. none of the above

10. Currently two message access protocols are available: _______

and _________
A. POP3; IMAP2
B. POP4; IMAP1
C. POP3; IMAP4
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 5

Q-1 Correct Answer :header; body
Q-2 Correct Answer :local part; domain name
Q-3 Correct Answer :MIME
Q-4 Correct Answer :MTAs
Q-5 Correct Answer :SMTP
Q-6 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-7 Correct Answer :push
Q-8 Correct Answer :pull
Q-9 Correct Answer :MAA
Q-10 Correct Answer :POP3; IMAP4
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – WWW and HTTP
multiple choice Questions and Answers (MCQ) PDF covers the
below lists of topics.

1. Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) Multiple Choice

Question and Answer.
Answer
2. Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) Multiple Choice
Question and Answer.
Answer
3. Common Gateway Interface (CGI) Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. ________ is a repository of information linked together from

points all over the world.
A. The WWW
B. HTTP
C. HTML
D. none of the above

2. The WWW today is a _______ client-server service, in which a

client using a browser can access a service using a server.
A. limited
B. vast
C. distributed
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

3. The _________ is a standard for specifying any kind of

information on the Internet
A. URL
B. ULR
C. RLU
D. none of the above

4. In a URL, the _______ is the client-server program used to

retrieve the document.
A. protocol
B. path
C. host
D. none of the above

5. In a URL, the ______ is the computer on which the information is

located.
A. path
B. protocol
C. host
D. none of the above

6. In a URL, an optional ________ can be inserted between the host

and
the path, and it is separated from the host by a colon.
A. path
B. protocol
C. host
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. In a URL, the _______ is the full name of the file where the
information is located.
A. path
B. protocol
C. host
D. none of the above

8. A cookie is made by the and eaten by the _

A. client; client
B. client; server
C. server; server
D. none of the above

9. The documents in the WWW can be grouped into ______ broad

categories
A. two
B. three
C. four
D. none of the above

10. A _______ document is a fixed-content document that is created

and stored in a server. The client can get a copy of the document
only.
A. static
B. dynamic
C. active
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :The WWW
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-2 Correct Answer :distributed

Q-3 Correct Answer :URL
Q-4 Correct Answer :protocol
Q-5 Correct Answer :host
Q-6 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-7 Correct Answer :path
Q-8 Correct Answer :server; server
Q-9 Correct Answer :three
Q-10 Correct Answer :static

WWW and HTTP multiple choice questions and answers MCQ Set
Set-2

1. _____________ is a language for creating Web pages.

A. HTTP
B. HTML
C. FTTP
D. none of the above

2. A _______ document is created by a Web server whenever a

browser requests the document
A. static
B. dynamic
C. active
D. none of the above

3. ___________ is a technology that creates and handles dynamic

documents
A. GIC
B. CGI
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. GCI
D. none of the above

4. Dynamic documents are sometimes referred to as _________

dynamic documents
A. client-site
B. server-site
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

5. For many applications, we need a program or a script to be run

at the client site. These are called _______________ documents
A. static
B. dynamic
C. active
D. none of the above

6. One way to create an active document is to use __________

A. CGI
B. Java stand-alone
alone programs
C. Java applets
D. none of the above

7. Active documents are sometimes referred to as _________

dynamic documents
A. client-site
B. server-site
C. both a and b
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. HTTP uses the services of _________ on well-known port 80

A. UDP
B. IP
C. TCP
D. none of the above

9. In HTTP, the first line in a request message is called a _______

line; the first line in the response message is called the ________ line
A. request; response
B. response; requestuest
C. response; status
D. none of the above

10. In a ___________ connection, one TCP connection is made for

each request/response
A. persistent
B. nonpersistent
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :HTML
Q-2 Correct Answer :dynamic
Q-3 Correct Answer :CGI
Q-4 Correct Answer :server-site
:server
Q-5 Correct Answer :active
Q-6 Correct Answer :Java applets
Q-7 Correct Answer :client-site
:client
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-8 Correct Answer :TCP

Q-9 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-10 Correct Answer :nonpersistent

WWW and HTTP multiple choice questions and answers MCQ Set
Set-3

1. In a ___________connection, the server leaves the connection

open for more requests after sending a response.
A. persistent
B. nonpersistent
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

2. HTTP version 1.1 specifies a _________connection by default.

A. persistent
B. nonpersistent
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

3. In HTTP, a _______ server is a computer that keeps copies of

responses to recent requests
A. regular
B. proxy
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

4. An HTTP request message always contains _______

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. a header and a body

B. a request line and a header
C. a status line, a header, and a body
D. none of the above

5. Which of the following is present in both an HTTP request line

and a status line?
A. HTTP version number
B. URL
C. status code
D. none of the above

6. The HTTP request line contains a _______ method to request a

document from the server
A. GET
B. POST
C. COPY
D. none of the above

7. A user needs to send the server some information. The request

line method is _______
A. OPTION
B. PATCH
C. POST
D. none of the above

8. The HTTP request line contains a _______ method to get

information about a document without retrieving the document
itself.
A. HEAD
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. POST
C. COPY
D. none of the above

9. A response message always contains _______

A. a header and a body
B. a request line and a header
C. a status line and a header
D. none of the above

10. An applet is _______ document application program.

A. a static
B. an active
C. a passive
D. a dynamic

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer :persistent
Q-2 Correct Answer :persistent
Q-3 Correct Answer :proxy
Q-4 Correct Answer :a request line and a header
Q-5 Correct Answer :HTTP version number
Q-6 Correct Answer :GET
Q-7 Correct Answer :POST
Q-8 Correct Answer :HEAD
Q-9 Correct Answer :a status line and a header
Q-10 Correct Answer :an active
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This Data Communication and Networking – Network

Management: SNMP multiple choice Questions and Answers
(MCQ) PDF covers the below lists of topics.
topic

1. Real-time
time Transport Control Protocol (RTCP) Multiple
Choice Question and Answer.
Answer
2. Time Transport Protocol (RTP) Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.
3. Real-time
time Transport Control Protocol (RTCP) Multiple
Choice Question and Answer.
Answer
4. Voice over IP Multiple Choice Question and Answer
Answer.
5. Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Multiple Choice Question
and Answer.

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. SNMP defines the ___________________ to be sent from a

manager to an agent and vice versa.
A. format of the packets
B. encoding of the packets
C. number of packets
D. none of the above

2. A manager is a host that runs the SNMP _______ process.

A. client
B. server
C. both a and b
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

3. An agent is a host or computer that runs the SNMP _______

process
A. client
B. server
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

4. SNMP uses two other protocols: and _

A. MIB; SMTP
B. SMI; MIB
C. FTP; SMI
D. none of the above

5. ________ defines the general rules for naming objects, defining

object types, and showing how to encode objects and values.
A. MIB
B. BER
C. SMI
D. none of the above

6. We can compare the task of network management to the task of

writing a program. Both tasks need rules. In network management
this is handled by ___________.
A. SMNP
B. MIB
C. SMI
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. We can compare the task of network management to the task of

writing a program. Both tasks need variable declarations. In
network management this is handled by _________.
A. SMNP
B. MIB
C. SMI
D. none of the above

8. We can compare the task of network management to the task of

writing a program. Both tasks have actions performed by
statements. In network management this is handled by _______.
A. SMNP
B. MIB
C. SMI
D. none of the above

9. SMI emphasizes three attributes to handle an object: _____,

________, and _________.
A. name; data type; size
B. name; size; encoding method
C. name; data type; encoding method
D. none of the above

10. To name objects globally, SMI uses an object identifier, which

is a hierarchical identifier based on a _______ structure
A. linear
B. tree
C. graph
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :format of the packets
Q-2 Correct Answer :client
Q-3 Correct Answer :server
Q-4 Correct Answer :SMI; MIB
Q-5 Correct Answer :SMI
Q-6 Correct Answer :SMI
Q-7 Correct Answer :MIB
Q-8 Correct Answer :SMNP
Q-9 Correct Answer :name; data type; encoding
method
Q-10 Correct Answer :tree

Network Management multiple choice

choic questions and answers MCQ Set
Set-
2

1. All objects managed by SNMP are given an object identifier. The

object identifier always starts with _______
A. 1.3.6.1.2.1
B. 1.3.6.1.2.2
C. 1.3.6.1.2.3
D. none of the above

2. To define the data type, SMI uses fundamental _______

definitions and adds some new definitions.
A. AMS.1
B. ASN.1
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

C. ASN.2
D. none of the above

3. SMI has two broad categories of data type: _______ and _______
A. simple; complex
B. simple; structured
C. structured; unstructured
D. none of the above

4. The _______ data types are atomic data types

A. structure
B. simple
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

5. SMI defines two structured data types: and _

A. sequence; atomic
B. sequence; sequence of
C. a sequence of; array
D. none of the above

6. SMI uses another standard, ___________, to encode data to be

transmitted over the network
A. MIB
B. ANS.1
C. BER
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. The _________ ordering enables a manager to access a set of

variables one after another by defining the first variable.
A. lexicographic
B. linear
C. non-linear
D. none of the above

8. The GetRequest PDU is sent from the _ to the ____

to retrieve the value of a variable or a set of variables
A. client; server
B. server; client
C. server; network
D. none of the above

9. The Response PDU is sent from the to the in

response to GetRequest or GetNextRequest
A. server; client
B. client; server
C. network; host
D. none of the above

10. The Trap PDU is sent from the ______ to the _______ to report
an event
A. server; client
B. client; server
C. network; host
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :1.3.6.1.2.1
Q-2 Correct Answer :ASN.1
Q-3 Correct Answer :simple; structured
Q-4 Correct Answer :simple
Q-5 Correct Answer :sequence; sequence of
Q-6 Correct Answer :BER
Q-7 Correct Answer :lexicographic
Q-8 Correct Answer :client; server
Q-9 Correct Answer :server; client
Q-10 Correct Answer :server; client

Network Management multiple choice questions and answers MCQ Set

Set-
3

1. SNMP uses the services of UDP on two well-known ports,

_______ and _______
A. 161; 162
B. 160; 161
C. 160; 162
D. none of the above

2. _______ runs the SNMP client program; _______ runs the SNMP
server program.
A. A manager; a manager
B. An agent; an agent
C. A manager; an agent
D. An agent; a manager
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

3. INTEGER, OCTET STRING, and ObjectIdentifier are _______

definitions used by SMI.
A. MIB
B. SNMP
C. ASN.1
D. none of the above

4. Which of the following could be a legitimate MIB object

identifier?
A. 1.3.6.1.2.1.1
B. 1.3.6.1.2.2.1
C. 2.3.6.1.2.1.2
D. none of the above

5. Which is a manager duty?

A. Retrieve the value of an object defined in an agent
B. Store the value of an object defined in an agent
C. a and b
D. none of the above

6. For a 1-byte length field, what is the maximum value for the data
length?
A. 127
B. 128
C. 255
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. An object id defines a _______. Add a zero suffix to define the

_______
A. variable; table
B. table; variable
C. variable; variable contents
D. none of the above

8. An SNMP agent can send _______ messages

A. GetRequest
B. SetRequest
C. Trap
D. none of the above

9. An SNMP agent can send _______ messages

A. Response
B. GetRequest
C. SetRequest
D. none of the above

10. The _______ field in the SNMP PDU is an offset that points to
the variable in error
A. community
B. enterprise
C. error index
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer :161; 162
Q-2 Correct Answer :A manager; an agent
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-3 Correct Answer :ASN.1

Q-4 Correct Answer :1.3.6.1.2.1.1
Q-5 Correct Answer :a and b
Q-6 Correct Answer :127
Q-7 Correct Answer :variable; variable contents
Q-8 Correct Answer :Trap
Q-9 Correct Answer :Response
Q-10 Correct Answer :error index
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This Data Communication and Networking – Multimedia multiple

choice Questions and Answers (MCQ) PDF covers the below lists
of topics.

1. Cryptography Multiple Choice Question and Answer

Answer.
2. Encryption Multiple Choice Question and Answer.
Answer.
3. Decryption Multiple Choice Question
Questi and Answer..
4. Symmetric-key
key cryptography Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.
5. Public-key cryptography Multiple Choice Question and
Answer.

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. We can divide audio and video services into _______ broad

categories.
A. three
B. two
C. four
D. none of the above

2. ________ audio/video refers to on-demand requests for

compressed audio/video files.
A. Streaming live
B. Streaming stored
C. Interactive
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

3. __________ audio/video refers to the broadcasting of radio and

TV programs through the Internet.
A. Interactive
B. Streaming live
C. Streaming stored
D. none of the above

4. _________ audio/video refers to the use of the Internet for

interactive audio/video applications.
A. Interactive
B. Streaming live
C. Streaming stored
D. none of the abovee

5. According to the Nyquist theorem, we need to sample an analog

signal ________times the highest frequency.
A. three
B. two
C. four
D. none of the above

6. In ________ encoding, the differences between the samples are

encoded instead of encoding all the sampled values.
A. predictive
B. perceptual
C. both a and b
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

7. ________ encoding is based on the science of psychoacoustics,

which is the study of how people perceive sound
A. Predictive
B. Perceptual
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

8. ____________ is used to compress images.

A. MPEG
B. JPEG
C. either a or b
D. none of the above

9. __________ is used to compress video.

A. MPEG
B. JPEG
C. either a or b
D. none of the above

10. The first phase of JPEG is ___________

A. DCT transformation
B. quantization
C. data compression
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :three
Q-2 Correct Answer :Streaming stored
Q-3 Correct Answer :Streaming live
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-4 Correct Answer :Interactive

Q-5 Correct Answer :two
Q-6 Correct Answer :predictive
Q-7 Correct Answer :Perceptual
Q-8 Correct Answer :JPEG
Q-9 Correct Answer :MPEG
Q-10 Correct Answer :DCT transformation

Multimedia multiple choice questions and answers MCQ Set

Set-2

1. The second phase of JPEG is ___________

A. DCT transformation
B. quantization
C. data compression
D. none of the above

2. The third phase of JPEG is ___________

A. DCT transformation
B. quantization
C. data compression
D. none of the above

3. Jitter is introduced in real-time data by the _______________

A. error caused during transmission
B. delay between packets
C. both a and b
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. To prevent _________, we can timestamp the packets and

separate the arrival time from the playback time.
A. error
B. jitter
C. either a or b
D. none of the above

5. A ________buffer is required for real-time traffic.

A. playback
B. reordering
C. sorting
D. none of the above

6. A __________on each packet is required for real-time traffic

A. timestamp
B. sequence number
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

7. Real-time traffic needs the support of ____________

A. broadcasting
B. multicasting
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

8. __________ means changing the encoding of a payload to a lower

quality to match the bandwidth of the receiving network.
A. Translation
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. Mixing
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

9. __________ means combining several streams of traffic

ffic into one
stream
A. Translation
B. Mixing
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

10. _________ is not suitable for interactive multimedia traffic

because it retransmits packets in case of errors.
A. UDP
B. TCP
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :quantization
Q-2 Correct Answer :data compression
Q-3 Correct Answer :delay between packets
Q-4 Correct Answer :jitter
Q-5 Correct Answer :playback
Q-6 Correct Answer :both a and b
Q-7 Correct Answer :multicasting
Q-8 Correct Answer :Translation
Q-9 Correct Answer :Mixing
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-10 Correct Answer :TCP

Multimedia multiple choice questions and answers MCQ Set

Set-3

1. ________ is the protocol designed to handle real-time traffic on

the Internet
A. TCP
B. UDP
C. RTP
D. none of the above

2. RTP uses a temporary even-numbered _______ port

A. UDP
B. TCP
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

3. ___________ is a protocol for controlling the flow and quality of

data.
A. RTP
B. RTCP
C. UDP
D. none of the above

4. RTCP uses an odd-numbered

numbered _______ port number that follows
the port number selected for RTP
A. UDP
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. TCP
C. both a and b
D. none of the above

5. ___________ is an application protocol that establishes, manages,

and terminates a multimedia session
A. RIP
B. SIP
C. DIP
D. none of the above

6. _______ is a standard to allow telephones on the public telephone

network to talk to computers connected to the Internet
A. SIP
B. H.323
C. Q.991
D. none of the above

7. A real-time video performance lasts 10 min. If there is jitter in

the system, the viewer spends _______ minutes watching the
performance
A. less than 10
B. more than 10
C. exactly 10
D. none of the above

8. A _______ shows the time a packet was produced relative to the

first or previous packet.
A. timestamp
B. playback buffer
C. sequence number
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

9. _______ are used to number the packets of a real-time

time
transmission
A. Timestamps
B. Playback buffers
C. Sequence numbers
D. none of the above

10. In a real-time video conference, data from the server is _______

to the client sites.
A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer :RTP
Q-2 Correct Answer :UDP
Q-3 Correct Answer :RTCP
Q-4 Correct Answer :UDP
Q-5 Correct Answer :SIP
Q-6 Correct Answer :H.323
Q-7 Correct Answer :more than 10
Q-8 Correct Answer :timestamp
Q-9 Correct Answer :Sequence numbers
Q-10 Correct Answer :multicast
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This Data Communication and Networking – Cryptography

multiple choice Questions and Answers (MCQ) PDF covers the
below lists of topics.

1. Cryptography Multiple Choice Question and Answer

Answer.

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. ________ is the science and art of transforming messages

to make them secure and immune to attacks.
A. Cryptography
B. Cryptoanalysis
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

2. The ________is the original message before transformation

A. ciphertext
B. plaintext
C. secret-text
D. none of the above

3. The ________ is the message after transformation

A. ciphertext
B. plaintext
C. secret-text
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

4. A(n) _______ algorithm transforms plaintext to ciphertext

A. encryption
B. decryption
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

5. A(n) ______ algorithm transforms ciphertext to plaintext

A. encryption
B. decryption
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

6. A combination of an encryption algorithm and a decryption

algorithm is called a ________.
A. cipher
B. secret
C. key
D. none of the above

7. The _______ is a number or a set of numbers on which the cipher

operates
A. cipher
B. secret
C. key
D. none of the above

8. In a(n) ________ cipher, the same key is used by both the sender
and receiver.
A. symmetric-key
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. asymmetric-key
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

9. In a(n) ________, the key is called the secret key.

A. symmetric-key
B. asymmetric-key
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

10. In a(n) ________ cipher, a pair of keys is used.

A. symmetric-key
B. asymmetric-key
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :Cryptography
Q-2 Correct Answer :plaintext
Q-3 Correct Answer :ciphertext
Q-4 Correct Answer :encryption
Q-5 Correct Answer :decryption
Q-6 Correct Answer :cipher
Q-7 Correct Answer :key
Q-8 Correct Answer :symmetric-key
:symmetric
Q-9 Correct Answer :symmetric-key
:symmetric
Q-10 Correct Answer :asymmetric-key
:asymmetric
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Cryptography multiple choice questions and answers MCQ Set

Set-2

1. In an asymmetric-key key cipher, the sender uses the__________ key.

A. private
B. public
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

2. In an asymmetric-key key cipher, the receiver uses the ______ key

A. private
B. public
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

3. A ________ cipher replaces one character with another

character.
A. substitution
B. transposition
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

4. _________ ciphers can be categorized into two broad categories:

monoalphabetic and polyalphabetic.
A. Substitution
B. Transposition
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

5. The _______ cipher is the simplest monoalphabetic cipher. It uses

modular arithmetic with a modulus of 26.
A. transposition
B. additive
C. shift
D. none of the above

6. The Caesar cipher is a _______cipher that has a key of 3.

A. transposition
B. additive
C. shift
D. none of the above

7. The ________ cipher reorders the plaintext characters to create a

ciphertext.
A. substitution
B. transposition
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

8. A(n) ______ is a keyless substitution cipher with N inputs and M

outputs that uses a formula to define the relationship between the
input stream and the output stream
A. S-box
B. P-box
C. T-box
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

9. A(n) _______is a keyless transposition cipher with N inputs and

M outputs that uses a table to define the relationship between the
input stream and the output stream
A. S-box
B. P-box
C. T-box
D. none of the above

10. A modern cipher is usually a complex _____cipher made of a

combination of different simple ciphers.
A. round
B. circle
C. square
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :public
Q-2 Correct Answer :private
Q-3 Correct Answer :substitution
Q-4 Correct Answer :Substitution
Q-5 Correct Answer :shift
Q-6 Correct Answer :shift
Q-7 Correct Answer :transposition
Q-8 Correct Answer :S-box
:S
Q-9 Correct Answer :P-box
:P
Q-10 Correct Answer :round

Cryptography multiple choice questions and answers MCQ Set

Set-3
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

1. DES is a(n) ________ method adopted by the U.S. government.

A. symmetric-key
B. asymmetric-key
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

2. DES has an initial and final permutation block and _________

rounds
A. 14
B. 15
C. 16
D. none of the above

3. The DES function has _______ components

A. 2
B. 3
C. 4
D. 5

4. DES uses a key generator to generate sixteen _______ round keys

A. 32-bit
B. 48-bit
C. 54-bit
D. 42-bit

5. ________ DES was designed to increase the size of the DES key
A. Double
B. Triple
C. Quadruple
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. none of the above

6. _______ is a round cipher based on the Rijndael algorithm that

uses a 128-bit block of data
A. AEE
B. AED
C. AER
D. AES

7. AES has _____ different configurations

A. two
B. three
C. four
D. five

8. ECB and CBC are ________ ciphers

A. block
B. stream
C. field
D. none of the above

9. One commonly used public-key cryptography method is the

______ algorithm
A. RSS
B. RAS
C. RSA
D. RAA
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

10. The ________ method provides a one-time session key for two
parties
A. Diffie-Hellman
B. RSA
C. DES
D. AES

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer :symmetric-key
:symmetric
Q-2 Correct Answer :16
Q-3 Correct Answer :4
Q-4 Correct Answer :48-bit
:48
Q-5 Correct Answer :Triple
Q-6 Correct Answer :AES
Q-7 Correct Answer :three
Q-8 Correct Answer :block
Q-9 Correct Answer :RSA
Q-10 Correct Answer :Diffie-Hellman
:Diffie
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – Network Security
multiple choice questions
uestions and answers (MCQ) PDF covers the
below lists of topics.

1. Network Security Multiple Choice Question and Answer

Answer.

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. Message ________ means that the sender and the receiver expect
privacy
A. confidentiality
B. integrity
C. authentication
D. none of the above

2. Message_____ means that the data must arrive at the receiver

exactly as sent
A. confidentiality
B. integrity
C. authentication
D. none of the above

3. Message _______ means that the receiver is ensured that the

message is coming from the intended sender, not an imposter
A. confidentiality
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

B. integrity
C. authentication
D. none of the above

4. ________ means that a sender must not be able to deny sending a

message that he sent.
A. Confidentiality
B. Integrity
C. Authentication
D. Nonrepudiation

5. _______ means to prove the identity of the entity that tries to

access the system's resources.
A. Message authentication
B. Entity authentication
C. Message confidentiality
D. none of the above

6. A(n) _________ can be used to preserve the integrity of a

document or a message.
message
A. message digest
B. message summary
C. encrypted message
D. none of the above

7. A(n) ________function creates a message digest out of a message.

A. encryption
B. decryption
C. hash
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. A hash function must meet ________ criteria.

A. two
B. three
C. four
D. none of the above

9. A _______ message digest is used as an MDC.

A. keyless
B. keyed
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

10. To authenticate the data origin, one needs a(n) _______.

A. MDC
B. MAC
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :confidentiality
Q-2 Correct Answer :integrity
Q-3 Correct Answer :authentication
Q-4 Correct Answer :Nonrepudiation
Q-5 Correct Answer :Entity authentication
Q-6 Correct Answer :message digest
Q-7 Correct Answer :hash
Q-8 Correct Answer :three
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-9 Correct Answer :keyless

Q-10 Correct Answer :MAC

Network Security multiple choice questions and answers MCQ Set

Set-2

1. A __ signature is included in the document; a _

signature is a separate entity.
A. conventional; digital
B. digital; digital
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

2. Digital signature provides ________

A. authentication
B. nonrepudiation
C. both (a) and (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

3. Digital signature cannot provide ________ for the message

A. integrity
B. confidentiality
C. nonrepudiation
D. authentication

4. If _________ is needed, a cryptosystem must be applied over the

scheme
A. integrity
B. confidentiality
C. nonrepudiation
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

D. authentication

5. A digital signature needs a(n)_________ system

A. symmetric-key
B. asymmetric-key
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

6. A witness used in entity authentication is ____________

A. something known
B. something possessed
C. something inherent
D. all of the above

7. In _______, a claimant proves her identity to the verifier by using

one of the three kinds of witnesses
A. message authentication
B. entity authentication
C. message confidentiality
D. message integrity

8. Password-based authentication can be divided into two broad

categories: _______ and _______
A. fixed; variable
B. time-stamped;
stamped; fixed
C. fixed; one-time
D. none of the above

9. In ________ authentication, the claimant proves that she knows a

secret without actually sending it
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. password-based
B. challenge-response
response
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

10. Challenge-response
response authentication can be done using ________
A. symmetric-key
key ciphers
B. asymmetric-keykey ciphers
C. keyed-hash
hash functions
D. all of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :conventional; digital
Q-2 Correct Answer :both (a) and (b)
Q-3 Correct Answer :confidentiality
Q-4 Correct Answer :confidentiality
Q-5 Correct Answer :asymmetric-key
:asymmetric
Q-6 Correct Answer :all of the above
Q-7 Correct Answer :entity authentication
Q-8 Correct Answer :fixed; one-time
Q-9 Correct Answer :challenge-response
:challenge
Q-10 Correct Answer :all of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Network Security multiple choice questions and answers MCQ Set

Set-3

1. A(n) _____ is a trusted third party that assigns a symmetric key

to two parties.
A. KDC
B. CA
C. KDD
D. none of the above

2. A(n)______ creates a secret key only between a member and the

center.
A. CA
B. KDC
C. KDD
D. none of the above

3. The secret key between members needs to be created as a ______

key when two members contact KDC.
A. public
B. session
C. complimentary
D. none of the above

4. __________ is a popular session key creator protocol that

requires an authentication server and a ticket-granting server.
A. KDC
B. Kerberos
C. CA
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

5. A(n) ________is a federal or state organization that binds a

public key to an entity and issues a certificate.
A. KDC
B. Kerberos
C. CA
D. none of the above

6. A(n) ______ is a hierarchical system that answers queries about

key certification.
A. KDC
B. PKI
C. CA
D. none of the above

7. The _______ criterion states that it must be extremely difficult or

impossible to create the message if the message digest is given.
A. one-wayness
B. weak-collision-resistance
resistance
C. strong-collision-resistance
resistance
D. none of the above

8. The ________ criterion ensures that a message cannot easily be

forged.
A. one-wayness
B. weak-collision-resistance
resistance
C. strong-collision-resistance
resistance
D. none of the above

9. The _______criterion ensures that we cannot find two messages

that hash to the same digest
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. one-wayness
B. weak-collision-resistance
resistance
C. strong-collision-resistance
resistance
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer :KDC
Q-2 Correct Answer :KDC
Q-3 Correct Answer :session
Q-4 Correct Answer :Kerberos
Q-5 Correct Answer :CA
Q-6 Correct Answer :CA
Q-7 Correct Answer :one-wayness
:one
Q-8 Correct Answer :weak-collision-resistance
resistance
Q-09 Correct Answer :strong-collision-resistance
:strong resistance
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

All the Multiple Choice Question and Answer (MCQs) have been
compiled from the books of Data Communication and Networking
by the
he well known author behrouz A forouzan.

This
his Data Communication and Networking – Security in the
Internet: IPSec, SSL/TLS, PGP, VPN, and Firewalls multiple
choice Questions and Answers (MCQ) PDF covers the below lists
of topics.

1. Security in the Internet Multiple Choice Question and

Answer.
2. IPSec,
c, SSL/TLS, PGP, VPN, and Firewalls Multiple Choice
Question and Answer.
Answer

Practice now to sharpen your concept.

1. _________ is a collection of protocols designed by the IETF

(Internet Engineering Task Force) to provide security for a packet
at the network level.
A. IPSec
B. SSL
C. PGP
D. none of the above

2. _________ operates in the transport mode or the tunnel mode.

A. IPSec
B. SSL
C. PGP
D. none of the above

3. In the ______ mode, IPSec protects information delivered from

the transport layer to the network layer.
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. transport
B. tunnel
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

4. IPSec in the ______ mode does not protect the IP header

header.
A. transport
B. tunnel
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

5. The _______ mode is normally used when we need host

host-to-host
(end-to-end) protection of data
A. transport
B. tunnel
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

6. In the _______ mode, IPSec protects the whole IP packet,

including the original IP header.
A. transport
B. tunnel
C. either (a) or (b)
D. neither (a) nor (b)

7. IPSec defines two protocols: _ and __

A. AH; SSL
B. PGP; ESP
C. AH; ESP
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

8. ______ provides authentication at the IP level.

A. AH
B. ESP
C. PGP
D. SSL

9. ______ provides either authentication or encryption, or both, for

packets at the IP level.
A. AH
B. ESP
C. PGP
D. SSL

10. IPSec uses a set of SAs called the ________

A. SAD
B. SAB
C. SADB
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 1

Q-1 Correct Answer :IPSec
Q-2 Correct Answer :IPSec
Q-3 Correct Answer :transport
Q-4 Correct Answer :transport
Q-5 Correct Answer :transport
Q-6 Correct Answer :tunnel
Q-7 Correct Answer :AH; ESP
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Q-8 Correct Answer :AH

Q-9 Correct Answer :ESP
Q-10 Correct Answer :SADB

Security in the Internet multiple choice questions and answers MCQ Set
Set-
2

1.______ is the protocol designed to create security associations,

both inbound and outbound.
A. SA
B. CA
C. KDC
D. IKE

2. IKE creates SAs for _____

A. SSL
B. PGP
C. IPSec
D. VP

3. IKE is a complex protocol based on ______ other protocols

A. two
B. three
C. four
D. five

4. IKE uses _______

Downloaded from www.examradar.com

A. Oakley
B. SKEME
C. ISAKMP
D. all of the above

5. A _______network is used inside an organization.

A. private
B. public
C. semi-private
D. semi-public

6. An ________ is a private network that uses the Internet model

A. intranet
B. internet
C. extranet
D. none of the above

7. An _________ is a network that allows authorized access from

outside users
A. intranet
B. internet
C. extranet
D. none of the above

8. The Internet authorities have reserved addresses for _______

A. intranets
B. internets
C. extranets
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

9. A ______ provides privacy for LANs that must communicate

through the global Internet.
Internet
A. VPP
B. VNP
C. VNN
D. VPN

10. A _______ layer security protocol provides end-to-end

end security
services for applications.
A. data link
B. network
C. transport
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 2

Q-1 Correct Answer :IKE
Q-2 Correct Answer :IPSec
Q-3 Correct Answer :three
Q-4 Correct Answer :all of the above
Q-5 Correct Answer :private
Q-6 Correct Answer :intranet
Q-7 Correct Answer :extranet
Q-8 Correct Answer :none of the above
Q-9 Correct Answer :VPN
Q-10 Correct Answer :transport
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

Security in the Internet multiple choice questions and answers MCQ Set
Set-
3

1. __ is actually an IETF version of _

A. TLS; TSS
B. SSL; TLS
C. TLS; SSL
D. SSL; SLT

2. ______ provide security at the transport layer.

A. SSL
B. TLS
C. either (a) or (b)
D. both (a) and (b)

3. _____ is designed to provide security and compression services to

data generated from the application layer.
A. SSL
B. TLS
C. either (a) or (b)
D. both (a) and (b)

4. Typically, ______ can receive application data from any

application layer protocol, but the protocol is normally HTTP
A. SSL
B. TLS
C. either (a) or (b)
D. both (a) and (b)
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

5. SSL provides _________

A. message integrity
B. confidentiality
C. compression
D. all of the above

6. The combination of key exchange, hash, and encryption

algorithms defines a ________ for each SSL session
A. list of protocols
B. cipher suite
C. list of keys
D. none of the above

7. In _______, the cryptographic algorithms and secrets are sent

with the message.
A. IPSec
B. SSL
C. TLS
D. PGP

8. One security protocol for the e-mail system is _________

A. IPSec
B. SSL
C. PGP
D. none of the above

9. ______ was invented by Phil Zimmerman

A. IPSec
B. SSL
C. PGP
D. none of the above
Downloaded from www.examradar.com

10. ____ provides privacy, integrity, and authentication in e-mail

A. IPSec
B. SSL
C. PGP
D. none of the above

Answer key for MCQ SET- 3

Q-1 Correct Answer :TLS; SSL
Q-2 Correct Answer :both (a) and (b)
Q-3 Correct Answer :both (a) and (b)
Q-4 Correct Answer :both (a) and (b)
Q-5 Correct Answer :all of the above
Q-6 Correct Answer :cipher suite
Q-7 Correct Answer :PGP
Q-8 Correct Answer :PGP
Q-9 Correct Answer :PGP
Q-10 Correct Answer :PGP

CrowdStrike IP DataSheet
No ratings yet
CrowdStrike IP DataSheet
19 pages
Peering and Internet Exchange1
No ratings yet
Peering and Internet Exchange1
47 pages
Thesis Proposal On: Scheduling Algorithm For Load Balancing in Fog Computing
No ratings yet
Thesis Proposal On: Scheduling Algorithm For Load Balancing in Fog Computing
20 pages
Fourozan MCQ From 4th Edition
100% (3)
Fourozan MCQ From 4th Edition
188 pages
Multiple Choice
No ratings yet
Multiple Choice
14 pages
Computer Networks MCQs
50% (4)
Computer Networks MCQs
42 pages
MCQS Computer Network
100% (2)
MCQS Computer Network
13 pages
Complete Mcqs Network
No ratings yet
Complete Mcqs Network
15 pages
Computer Networking MCQ Set
No ratings yet
Computer Networking MCQ Set
5 pages
Computer Science MCQs
No ratings yet
Computer Science MCQs
14 pages
Computer Network MCQ 50
100% (1)
Computer Network MCQ 50
18 pages
CCNAquestions Mar 2018
No ratings yet
CCNAquestions Mar 2018
218 pages
Kerala PSC HSST Computer Science Syllabus
No ratings yet
Kerala PSC HSST Computer Science Syllabus
5 pages
ACN MCQ Merged
No ratings yet
ACN MCQ Merged
747 pages
CS 506 Mids MCQs
No ratings yet
CS 506 Mids MCQs
374 pages
Networking Questions
No ratings yet
Networking Questions
18 pages
Bca 501 Computer Networks
100% (1)
Bca 501 Computer Networks
19 pages
All Mcqs Network
100% (1)
All Mcqs Network
163 pages
All Mcqs
No ratings yet
All Mcqs
52 pages
ISRO - CS Questions
No ratings yet
ISRO - CS Questions
51 pages
MCQ DBMS
No ratings yet
MCQ DBMS
448 pages
Computer System Architecture MCQ Bank PDF
100% (1)
Computer System Architecture MCQ Bank PDF
106 pages
CN 1st Unit MCQ 200
100% (1)
CN 1st Unit MCQ 200
39 pages
Answer: D
100% (1)
Answer: D
16 pages
Unit No 4 LAN MCQs
No ratings yet
Unit No 4 LAN MCQs
3 pages
MCQs
100% (1)
MCQs
52 pages
CN Bits
No ratings yet
CN Bits
19 pages
Data Communication and Computer Network Set 1
No ratings yet
Data Communication and Computer Network Set 1
5 pages
Os MCQ
No ratings yet
Os MCQ
14 pages
CH 2 Data Communication Networking Network Model Multiple Choice Questions and Answers PDF Behrou PDF
No ratings yet
CH 2 Data Communication Networking Network Model Multiple Choice Questions and Answers PDF Behrou PDF
17 pages
Networking Questions
No ratings yet
Networking Questions
1,074 pages
DBMS Gate2010
100% (1)
DBMS Gate2010
10 pages
MCQ It
100% (2)
MCQ It
180 pages
Data Link Layer: Final 2009 (24 Questions)
0% (1)
Data Link Layer: Final 2009 (24 Questions)
27 pages
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-1 ExamRadar
No ratings yet
Data Communication & Networking MCQs Set-1 ExamRadar
6 pages
Computer Network MCQ
No ratings yet
Computer Network MCQ
42 pages
Cs601 700SolvedMCqs
No ratings yet
Cs601 700SolvedMCqs
128 pages
CH 19 Network Layer Logical Addressing Multiple Choice Questions and Answers PDF
No ratings yet
CH 19 Network Layer Logical Addressing Multiple Choice Questions and Answers PDF
15 pages
Network Engineer MCQ
No ratings yet
Network Engineer MCQ
31 pages
MCQ
No ratings yet
MCQ
6 pages
Computer Networks and Security MCQ
No ratings yet
Computer Networks and Security MCQ
23 pages
Compiler Counstruction MCQ Question Bank PDF
No ratings yet
Compiler Counstruction MCQ Question Bank PDF
14 pages
Iot MCQ
No ratings yet
Iot MCQ
10 pages
Telecommunication Fundaments MCQs
67% (9)
Telecommunication Fundaments MCQs
5 pages
Database Management System Multiple Choice Questions
No ratings yet
Database Management System Multiple Choice Questions
7 pages
Computer Networks MCQ Questions and Answers With PDF Download
100% (1)
Computer Networks MCQ Questions and Answers With PDF Download
6 pages
MCQ On Network Topology
No ratings yet
MCQ On Network Topology
2 pages
DBMS MCQ
50% (4)
DBMS MCQ
27 pages
CMCQ
No ratings yet
CMCQ
18 pages
CS601 MCQ's
100% (1)
CS601 MCQ's
119 pages
Object Oriented Programming Questions and Answers - Classes: Student
100% (1)
Object Oriented Programming Questions and Answers - Classes: Student
5 pages
Computer Network 1
No ratings yet
Computer Network 1
5 pages
Computer Network MCQ - ANSWERS
No ratings yet
Computer Network MCQ - ANSWERS
26 pages
Bca501: Core - 18: Computer Networks Multiple Choice Questions
No ratings yet
Bca501: Core - 18: Computer Networks Multiple Choice Questions
20 pages
Wireless MCQs
No ratings yet
Wireless MCQs
73 pages
MCQ Datacoms PDF
No ratings yet
MCQ Datacoms PDF
24 pages
CN MCQ
No ratings yet
CN MCQ
43 pages
Data Communications Farozen Bits - 1
No ratings yet
Data Communications Farozen Bits - 1
103 pages
Forouzan QandA
No ratings yet
Forouzan QandA
40 pages
Mcqs of Chapter 1: C. Message
No ratings yet
Mcqs of Chapter 1: C. Message
42 pages
DCCN
No ratings yet
DCCN
42 pages
network ques
No ratings yet
network ques
4 pages
ch1,2 MCQ
No ratings yet
ch1,2 MCQ
10 pages
CMPG Su 3
No ratings yet
CMPG Su 3
22 pages
Liftmaster MYQPCK Manual
No ratings yet
Liftmaster MYQPCK Manual
8 pages
Sodo
No ratings yet
Sodo
57 pages
Antivirus Configuration Guide For The Teramind Agent: Updated: 06/MAY/2020
No ratings yet
Antivirus Configuration Guide For The Teramind Agent: Updated: 06/MAY/2020
21 pages
Network Chapter1,2
No ratings yet
Network Chapter1,2
3 pages
Creating A Connection To A Remote Device Using Winsock
No ratings yet
Creating A Connection To A Remote Device Using Winsock
4 pages
Network Guide
No ratings yet
Network Guide
216 pages
Alarms Reference: Nortel Multiservice Data Manager
No ratings yet
Alarms Reference: Nortel Multiservice Data Manager
179 pages
2024 BeartoothGuide-compressed
No ratings yet
2024 BeartoothGuide-compressed
40 pages
Interview Question Asked To Me ..
No ratings yet
Interview Question Asked To Me ..
4 pages
Body Area Networks
No ratings yet
Body Area Networks
10 pages
Cisco Selftestengine 300-415 Practice Test 2023-Jul-20 by Truman 165q Vce
No ratings yet
Cisco Selftestengine 300-415 Practice Test 2023-Jul-20 by Truman 165q Vce
29 pages
WMI Log Collection Using A Non-Admin Domain User
No ratings yet
WMI Log Collection Using A Non-Admin Domain User
8 pages
2.2 Introduction To Networks - IOS Navigation
No ratings yet
2.2 Introduction To Networks - IOS Navigation
3 pages
Chapter 4b - Network Layer - The Control Plane
No ratings yet
Chapter 4b - Network Layer - The Control Plane
46 pages
By Earning An MCITP Certification
No ratings yet
By Earning An MCITP Certification
3 pages
DP Biometric 13115 Drivers
No ratings yet
DP Biometric 13115 Drivers
162 pages
Sip Config Guide Asterisk Trixbox
No ratings yet
Sip Config Guide Asterisk Trixbox
64 pages
VLSM Subnetting Explained With Examples
100% (1)
VLSM Subnetting Explained With Examples
5 pages
CS 382 - Network-Centric Computing Notes
No ratings yet
CS 382 - Network-Centric Computing Notes
155 pages
Matilda 5G-PPP
No ratings yet
Matilda 5G-PPP
4 pages
Motorola IMS Applications
No ratings yet
Motorola IMS Applications
8 pages
What Is The Dif-WPS Office
No ratings yet
What Is The Dif-WPS Office
3 pages
WikiHow To Fix DNS Server Not Responding Problem
No ratings yet
WikiHow To Fix DNS Server Not Responding Problem
13 pages
MULTI-ROUTER TCP 0211 Installation & Operation Manual
No ratings yet
MULTI-ROUTER TCP 0211 Installation & Operation Manual
30 pages
NS MODEL A1-1,2,3,4,5
No ratings yet
NS MODEL A1-1,2,3,4,5
2 pages
MOP - For GB Over IP - Configuration - ZTE SGSN
No ratings yet
MOP - For GB Over IP - Configuration - ZTE SGSN
6 pages